meadowlark botainical gardens visitors ......meadowlark botainical gardens visitors center entrance...

MEADOWLARK BOTAINICAL GARDENS

VISITORS CENTER ENTRANCE IMPROVEMENTS 9750 Meadowlark Gardens Court

Vienna, VA 22182 PROJECT MANUAL June 9, 2016

NOVA Parks Northern Virginia Regional Park Authority

5400 Ox Road Fairfax Station, VA 22039

CONTENTS

Number of Pages 1. Invitation to Bid ......................................................................................................2 2. Form of Proposal ......................................................................................................2 3. Supplemental General Conditions ..........................................................................3 4. Specifications .......................................................................................................204 5. General Conditions ................................................................................................26 6. Form of Contract ......................................................................................................2

INVITATION TO BID MEADOWLARK BOTAINICAL GARDENS


Vienna, VA 22182 Sealed bids will be received by mail or in person at the NOVA Parks Headquarters, 5400 Ox Road, Fairfax Station, Virginia 22039, until Wednesday, July 6, 2016 at 1:30 p.m. Bids will be opened in public at that time. This project includes the removal and installation of existing concrete and brick paver walks and installation of new concrete and pavers to include all site work as shown on the drawings and stated in the project manual. The contractor shall furnish all equipment, material and labor in accordance with the project manual and plans. Five percent bid bond or certified check required for all bids over $500,000. Bid bonds shall be 5% of the total sum of the Base Bid and all alternates. All bids and bid bonds shall remain valid for ninety days. Performance and Labor and Material Payment bonds shall be required of the successful bidder for all contracts awarded over $500,000. The Project Manual and the Project Drawings can be downloaded from the NVRPA website (www.novaparks.com) at https://www.novaparks.com/about/bids-proposals. The Contractor shall be responsible to verify and obtain any addendum prior to the bid date. Project addenda will be posted on the website. The Contract documents include the following:

Project Manual dated June 9, 2016. Project Drawing by Rhodeside & Harwell Sheets G001, G002, L001, L002, L003, L101,

L201, L202, L203, L301, L302, L303, L304, L305, E000, E100, E200, S001 & S101 The park is open 7 days a week however; the Contractor is encouraged to call the park at 703-255-3631, to ensure access prior to visiting the site.

Questions concerning this project shall be directed to Tim Geisler, Project Manager. All questions regarding the project or bid shall be in writing and can be sent via fax to 703-273-0905, email [email protected] or mailed to the Park Authority Headquarters.

All interested Bidders should formally register with the NOVA Parks by contacting Mrs. Diane Creasey via email at [email protected] or fax at (703) 352-0509. Bidders shall provide Mrs. Creasey with the following information: Company Name Contact Person Address Phone and Fax Numbers Email Address

*****END OF INVITATION TO BID*****

FORM OF PROPOSAL - PAGE 1 OF 2 MEADOWLARK BOTAINICAL GARDENS


Vienna, VA 22182 PROPOSAL To furnish all material, labor, tools, equipment and supplies to perform all work specified herein and shown in the contract documents.

Name of Bidder:

Address of Bidder:

Signature/Title:

Print Name:

Date:

Virginia Contractor’s License Number:

Telephone Number:

To: Todd Hafner, Director of Planning and Development

Northern Virginia Regional Park Authority 5400 Ox Road Fairfax Station, Virginia 22039 (703) 352-5900

Pursuant to and in compliance with the contract documents, the undersigned proposes and agrees, if this proposal is accepted, to furnish all labor, materials, supplies, equipment and other facilities, and to perform all work described in the contract documents in the manner therein prescribed for consideration of the following amounts.

FORM OF PROPOSAL - PAGE 2 OF 2 MEADOWLARK BOTAINICAL GARDENS


Vienna, VA 22182 BASE BID: All work as shown in the project plans and stated in the project except for all electrical work. _______________________________________________________Dollars / $______________ Add Alternate #1: Additional Cost to change Concrete walks from broom swept finish to an exposed aggregate finish _______________________________________________________Dollars / $______________ Add Alternate #2: Unit Price to install standard silt fence ______________________________________________Per Foot - Dollars / $___________/ft Acknowledges Receipt of Addendum # dated . Acknowledges Receipt of Addendum # dated . Acknowledges Receipt of Addendum # dated .

*****END OF FORM OF PROPOSAL*****

SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS All bidders shall submit their bids on the Form of Proposal. NOTE: All electrical work will be done by others. The contractor will work with the Park Authority’s Electrician to coordinate the installation of necessary subsurface material and equipment. The contractor shall repair all miscellaneous damages caused during the course of this project. It is the intent of this project to provide complete and usable entrance walks. The contractor shall provide all labor and materials necessary to provide a complete project. The contractor shall be responsible for meeting all VDOT and any other government requirements regarding construction traffic utilizing their roadways and entrances to the trail. The project shall be completed within 35 days of the written notice to proceed. If the work is not completed within the time required, as that time may be adjusted by change orders, there shall be imposed on the contractor liquidated damages of $500.00 per calendar day for each day beyond the contract time it takes to complete the work. Where submittals are required, three copies shall be submitted to the Park Authority at least seven days prior to delivery and use of the material or product at the site. The Park Authority shall review submittals within four days. If the submittal is rejected, the contractor shall resubmit as required and delay delivery and use of the material or product until the submittal is approved. This delay shall not be cause for an extension of the contract completion date. No work shall be permitted on weekends or holidays. No work shall begin before 7:00 a.m. and all work shall be completed by 6:00 p.m. All work shall be completed in strict conformance with the project manual and project drawings. Contractor shall be responsible to provide all necessary project survey and stake out. Contractor shall provide complete submittals of all materials to be used on this project. This includes providing samples of the materials along with a small mockup of the exposed aggregate concrete for the Park Authority’s approval. Compaction testing, if determined to be necessary by the Park Authority, shall be provided by the Park Authority. The contractor shall reimburse the Park Authority for the costs of compaction re-testing in failed areas in addition to being responsible for repairing or reconstructing the failed areas.

All excess excavated material to be removed from the site and properly disposed by the

Contractor. A copy of all material delivery tickets shall be given to the Park Authority representative on site at the time of delivery or when otherwise requested. All new topsoil and disturbed areas shall be seeded with a tall turf type fescue and mulched with straw. All clumps, rocks, and debris larger than 3/4" in diameter shall be removed. All excavations shall be backfilled prior to the end of the workday or they shall be completely surrounded by safety fencing. If there is a discrepancy in the bid documents, the stricter requirement shall apply. PART II. - WARRANTY AND AS-BUILTS The Contractor shall provide a written warranty to the Park Authority covering all defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year form the date of project completion. All warranties provided by the equipment and materials manufacturers shall also be provided to the Park Authority. The Contractor shall maintain during the progress of the work, a complete and up-to-date set of As-built drawings and specifications, which shall be available for inspection by the Owner and Architect at any time. These documents shall be marked up to record all changes in the work as they occur. As-built documents shall be neatly marked with red colored pencil or ink and three copies shall be delivered to the Owner in a condition satisfactory to him as a condition precedent to final acceptance of the work. The Contractor shall provide the Owner’s manual detailing equipment specifications and proper use and maintenance of all building materials. The Contractor shall provide three copies of the Operating and Maintenance manual. Each copy should be bound in a sturdy three ring binder, indexed and labeled as follows:

OPERATING & MAINTENANCE MANUAL MEADOWLARK BOTAINICAL GARDENS


Vienna, VA 22182 -DATE-

The typewritten manuals shall include the following: 1. Name, address, telephone number and contact person (if applicable) of all Contractor(s)

involved in the project. 2. The Contractors’ written one-year warranties as noted above. 3. Complete manufacturers’ operating and maintenance instructions for all materials and

equipments. 4. Manufacturers’ warrantees for all materials and equipment. 5. List of color selections used for all finishes, to include the brand name, manufacturer and

color numbers. PART 3 - PROTECTION OF ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES AND ARTIFACTS 1. PROTECTION OF ARCHAEOLOGICAL RESOURCES

A. The Owner and the local jurisdiction have determined that there might be archaeological resources on this site. The Contractor shall recognize preservation responsibilities as defined in the Archaeological and Historic Preservation Act of 1974" and revised in 1992, and shall be governed by them and the provisions contained herein.

B. The Contractor shall notify the Owner at least 48 hours prior to any ground

disturbing activities.

C. In the event that archaeological resources are identified during construction, all work shall be temporarily suspended in those areas. Work shall not resume in those areas until notified by the Owner.

D. The Contractor shall provide access to the site for any archaeological staff, as

directed by the Owner.

E. The Contractor shall keep accurate records of any delays associated with suspended work related to archaeological resources, and shall submit any claims for extension of time to the Owner in accordance with the general conditions. Monetary claims for such delays shall be approved at the sole discretion of the Owner.

2. ARTIFACTS

A. All artifacts found on the site shall remain the property of the Owner.

B. All artifacts discovered on the site shall be left in place and intact, until removed by the Owner, or by his archaeological staff, or as otherwise directed by the Owner.

*****END OF SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS*****

Meadowlark Botanical Gardens Vienna, Virginia

Visitors Center Entrance Improvements

100% Construction Documents Specifications

18 May | 2016

OWNER:

Northern Virginia Regional Park Authority 5400 Ox Road

Fairfax Station, Virginia 22039

PRIME CONSULTANT:

Rhodeside & Harwell Landscape Architecture

________________________________ Elliot I Rhodeside

VA Licensed Landscape Architect Lic. No. 118

18 May | 2016 – Construction Documents Specifications

Meadowlark Botanical Gardens Visitors Center Entrance Improvements

VIENNA, VIRGINIA IN THE COUNTY OF FAIRFAX

SCOPE OF WORK

Furnishing of all labor, equipment and materials to complete in every detail of the work indicated on the plans and/or outlined in the specifications and for all work incidental thereto for the rehabilitation of a portion of the Visitors Center entrance at the Meadowlark Botanical Gardens, including:

Demolition, Earthwork Tree Preservation Walkways and Paving Improvements Stairs and Railings Brick Walls

Note: All Electrical work to be performed by Owner’s Electrician. Contractor will work with Owner to coordinate the electrical work with his work. Consultants include:

Site Surveying: RC Fields & Associates, Inc. (RC Fields) Structural Engineering: McMullan & Associates (McMullan) Electrical Engineering: Potomac Energy Group (PEG)

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS NUMBER SECTION ................................................................................................................. AUTHOR(S) DIVISION 01 011000 Summary .................................................................................................................. RHI 012300 Alternates ................................................................................................................. RHI 013100 Project Management and Coordination ................................................................... RHI 013200 Construction Progress Documentation .................................................................... RHI 013233 Photographic Documentation ................................................................................... RHI 013300 Submittal Procedures ............................................................................................... RHI 014000 Quality Requirements............................................................................................... RHI 015639 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection ...................................................................... RHI 016000 Product Requirements ............................................................................................. RHI 017300 Execution ................................................................................................................. RHI 017700 Closeout Procedures................................................................................................ RHI 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data ............................................................................ RHI 017839 Project Record Documents ...................................................................................... RHI DIVISION 03 033000 Cast in Place Concrete ............................................................................................ McMullan DIVISION 04 042000 Unit Masonry ............................................................................................................ RHI/McMullan 044300 Stone Masonry ......................................................................................................... RHI DIVISION 05 057300 Decorative Metal Railings ........................................................................................ RHI DIVISION 12 129300 Site Furnishings ....................................................................................................... RHI DIVISION 26 (Proivded for Reference) 260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ............................................ PEG DIVISION 31 311000 Site Clearing ............................................................................................................. RHI 312000 Earth Moving ............................................................................................................ RHI DIVISION 32 321216 Asphalt Paving ......................................................................................................... RHI 321313 Concrete Paving ....................................................................................................... RHI 321373 Concrete Paving Joint Sealants ............................................................................... RHI 321400 Unit Paving ............................................................................................................... RHI 329113 Soil Preparation ........................................................................................................ RHI 329300 Turf and Grasses .................................................................................................... RHI

© 2016 Rhodeside & Harwell MEADOWLARK BOTANICAL GARDENS 100% Construction Documents

SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and all other Specification Sections.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Document Hierarchy. 3. Summary of Contract Documents. 4. Work covered by Contract Documents. 5. Contractor's Responsibilities. 6. Access to site. 7. Coordination with occupants. 8. Work restrictions. 9. Specification and drawing conventions. 10. Alternates. 11. Construction Progress Documentation. 12. Construction Waste Management and Disposal 13. Quality Requirements 14. Warranties 15. Extra Materials

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Meadowlark Botanical Gardens – Entrance Improvements

1. Project Location: 9750 Meadowlark Gardens Court, Vienna, VA 22182

B. Owner: Northern Virginia Regional Parks Authority (NOVA Parks)

C. Landscape Architect: Whenever the terms “Consultant”, “Landscape Architect”, “Architect”, “Engineer”, “Designer” or similar is used in the contract documents or elsewhere, it shall be understood as referring to the Landscape Architect (Rhodeside & Harwell, Incorporated) for the purposes of this Contract.

1. Point of Contact: Kevin Fisher (703-683-7447)

D. Landscape Architect's Consultants: The Landscape Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:


SUMMARY 011000 - 2

1. Land Surveying: RC Fields & Associates, Inc. (730 Washington Street, Alexandria, VA 22314)

2. Structural Engineering: McMullan & Associates (1861 Wiehle Avenue, Suite 125, Reston, VA 20190)

3. Electrical Engineering: Potomac Energy Group (2901 Telestar Court, Suite 400, Falls Church, VA 22042)

1.4 DOCUMENT HEIRARCHY

A. The Notice to Bidders, Bid Form / Proposal, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and/or Supplementary Specifications shall govern and prevail in the case of conflict between them and the any other specification Section (Divisions 1 through 32).

B. The following Standard Specifications and Codes shall be considered a part of each Specification where such specifications are applicable, and shall include all current changes and revisions. Specifications contained herein shall prevail; items not covered in specifications contained herein shall be governed by the following, in order of priority:

1. Ordinances and Laws of the State of Virginia, County of Fairfax, City of Vienna. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials. 3. Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Law, Regulations, and Certification Regulations.

1.5 SUMMARY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Contract Documents include:

1. Owner-Contractor Agreement, 2. General Conditions, 3. Supplemental Conditions, 4. Project Manual (Bidding & Contract Requirements and Technical Specifications), and 5. Drawings, dated 18 May 2016.

B. Bidders should satisfy themselves that they have a complete set of printed contract documents. Bidders shall review available exhibits. Missing contract document pages, lack of review of existing site conditions, and/or lack of review of available exhibits will not constitute the basis for a valid claim

C. Items noted as "N.I.C." or "Not In Contract" or "By Others" within the Contract Documents are items to be constructed by other parties before, during or after the work of this project, and are not required to be constructed by Contractor. Contractor is required to coordinate his or her work with the work of other parties.

1.6 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:


SUMMARY 011000 - 3

1. Landscape and site improvements including new brick walls, stairs and handrails, sidewalks, and lighting.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Permits, Fees, Notices, and Taxes: Secure and pay for all required permits, licenses, approvals, inspections, and taxes and shall give all notices and comply with all laws and government regulations in connection with the performance of this Contract.

B. Utility Coordination: Make all arrangements with, contract with, and schedule the work of utility companies to complete this work by the project Date of Substantial Completion. Conduct a Pre-installation Conference with each engaged utility company.

C. Include all Contractor related costs, including overhead and profit, for all other electrical work and patching and repair of streets, paving, curbing and other surface materials (labor, equipment, materials, and incidentals) that is not provided by the utility company in Contract Lump Sum Bid.

1.8 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to Limits of Work (L.O.W) indicated on the Contract Drawings.

2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, parking areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials, unless otherwise allowed by written proof from Owner.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.

b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

1.9 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and building(s) during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated.


SUMMARY 011000 - 4

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Notify Owner not less than 72hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

3. Before construction commences, Contractor to consult with Owner to provide detailed plan for maintaining accessible entry to alternate building entrance while Work is being performed.

1.10 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Work should not commence before stated time in City Ordinance.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7:00a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Weekend Hours: Must be approved by Owner in writing in advance. 2. Early Morning Hours: Must be in compliance with regulations by authorities having

jurisdiction for noisy or loud work and approved by Owner in writing in advance. 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Must be approved by Owner in writing in advance.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Landscape Architect/Owner not less than three (3) days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Landscape Architect/Owner not less than three (3) days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

F. Employee Identification: Not Required.

G. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site.


SUMMARY 011000 - 5

1.11 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Organization of Drawings and Specifications: Organization of the Specifications into divisions and sections, and arrangement or numbering of Drawings is intended solely for the convenience of the Contractor in locating information within the Contract Documents, and shall not control the Contractor in his responsibilities to divide the Work among subcontractors or to establish the extent of work to be performed by any trade. Neither the Owner nor the Landscape Architect assumes any liability arising out of jurisdictional issues or claims advanced by trade organizations or other interested parties based on the arrangement or organization of Drawings or Specifications.

D. Singular vs. Plural: Materials, products, equipment, or other items of work referred to in the singular shall be construed as plural where applicable by the intent of the Contract Documents, and shall not limit quantities to be provided by the Contractor.

E. References to Subcontractors or Trades: References to subcontractors, trades, or other entities which are not parties to the Owner-Contractor Agreement shall be construed as meaning the Contractor, whose responsibility it shall be to divide the Work among subcontractors or trades. Such references are used as a matter of convention, and are not intended to preclude or direct the Contractor's responsibility to divide the Work.

F. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and as scheduled on Drawings.

3. The drawings and specifications, taken together, describe the design for this project. The drawings and specifications shall be used as complimentary to each other.

4. That which is shown on the drawings but not in the specifications, or shown in the specifications but not on the drawings, shall be provided as if shown in both places and to the same standard of quality for similar items.

5. Drawings show extent, location, dimensions, relationships among various parts, and quantity of items. In case of conflict with the specifications in these matters, the drawings shall govern.


SUMMARY 011000 - 6

6. Specifications show quality, trade name, generic names and workmanship. In case of conflict with the drawings in these matters, the specifications shall govern.

7. The larger the scale of the drawing, the greater precedence; e.g. a 1-inch-equals-1-foot drawing governs over a 1-inch-equals-10-feet drawing.

8. Do not scale drawings. Use explicitly written dimensions, lines of layout and layout points of beginning for project horizontal control.

1.12 ALTERNATES

A. Alternate: An Alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

B. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

C. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

D. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

E. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

F. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

1.13 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

A. Within ten days after the execution of the Contract, Provide a detailed construction schedule. Update construction schedule every 2 weeks for reissue to the Owner and Landscape Architect, including the following information:

1. Each task required for completion of the Work; including all work by Contractor and subcontractors and allowing for coordination with work done by others

2. Start date and end date of each task, with duration in calendar days; 3. Indicate the number of days that each task is ahead of schedule or behind schedule. 4. Indicate critical path for completion of the Work. Critical path shall demonstrate the

order of Contractor’s operations for items whose completion is critical to the completion of other items.

5. Indicate on construction schedule time for preparation and review of submittals. List only “Action Submittals” (See Division 1 Section “Submittal Procedures”). Include submittals as critical path items for associated trade work.


SUMMARY 011000 - 7

B. Changes to the construction schedule shall be subject to the approval of the Landscape Architect, but such action by the Landscape Architect or the failure so to act shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility under this Contract.

C. Authorization to proceed with the Work will not be issued until Production Schedule has been received and approved by the Landscape Architect.

D. Progress payments will not be approved in the event progress of the Work deviates significantly from the current approved Production Schedule.

E. Photographic Documentation:

1. Digital Images:

a. Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of six (6) megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400pixels.

b. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

c. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.

2. Photographer: A professional photographer is not required and the photos can be taken by Contractor’s staff.

3. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

a. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.

4. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points.

a. Take photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work.

5. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take photographs with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

a. Take photographs representative of all work to be concealed, included but not limited to: 1) Footings, 2) Reinforcement, 3) Trenching, 4) Conduits, 5) Piping and utilities, 6) Subsurface drainage, and 7) Earthwork operations


SUMMARY 011000 - 8

1.14 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

A. General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75percent by weight of total non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials.

1.15 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

B. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

C. Mockups: Construct full-size physical assemblies on-site. Construct mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

a. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Landscape Architect.

b. Notify Landscape Architect three (3) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

c. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project.

d. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. e. Obtain Landscape Architect's approval of mockups before starting work,

fabrication, or construction. 1) Allow three (3) days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

f. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

2. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

D. Experienced Constructors: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.


SUMMARY 011000 - 9

E. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Landscape Architect for a decision before proceeding.

F. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Landscape Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.16 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warrant for a one-year period (unless another period is specified for a particular item) commencing on the date of Substantial Completion:

B. Warrant that the work contains no faulty or imperfect material or equipment or any imperfect, careless, or unskilled workmanship.

C. Warrant that all work, utility systems, equipment, machines, devices, plant materials, and all other work shall be adequate for the use to which they are intended, and shall operate or survive with ordinary care and attention in a satisfactory and efficient manner.

D. Re-execute, correct, repair, or remove and replace with proper Work, without cost to the Owner, any Work found by the Owner not to be as warranted by this section. Repair all damages caused to other work or materials in the process of complying with this Section.

E. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

F. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

1.17 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials in unopened original manufacturer's packaging, undamaged and clearly labeled. Deliver materials to the Project Site. Do not install extra materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000


ALTERNATES 012300 - 1

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.


ALTERNATES 012300 - 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Add Alternate No. 1

1. Base Bid: Light Broom-Finish concrete paving as specified in Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving."

2. Alternate: Exposed Aggregate concrete paving as specified in Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving."



PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

B. Related Requirements:

1. General Conditions Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Bid Form b. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. c. Submittal schedule. d. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule. 1) Separate costs for work to be completed following Substantial Completion

(e.g. maintenance and warranty phases) from work to be completed prior to Substantial Completion.



2. Submit the schedule of values to Landscape Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days after contract execution.

3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment.

4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location: Meadowlark Botanical Gardens – Entrance Improvements; Vienna, VA

b. Name of Landscape Architect: Rhodeside & Harwell c. Landscape Architect's project number: #44831 d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.



a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Landscape Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Landscape Architect by the last day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month

1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Landscape Architect.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Landscape Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.



E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit two signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Landscape Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list (preliminary if not final). 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Landscape Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.



2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

I. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof

that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Requests for Information (RFIs). 4. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Landscape Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including plant suppliers and those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.



B. Key Personnel Names: Within 10 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations of each subcontractor with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate the work of each subcontractor, especially work of subcontractors whose different trades depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. General Contractor shall communicate directly with Owner and Landscape Architect for all construction related issues. Owner and Landscape Architect will refuse submittals, RFI’s or other formal correspondence received directly from Subcontractors.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences.



7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS – (Not Used)

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Landscape Architect will return RFIs submitted to Landscape Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name: Meadowlark Botanical Gardens – Entrance Improvements 2. Project number: #44831 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Landscape Architect: Rhodeside & Harwell 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the

Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716,Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Landscape Architect.



1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Landscape Architect's Action: Landscape Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven (7) working days for Landscape Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Landscape Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Landscape Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. h. Requests for information received directly from subcontractors rather than from

the General Contractor.

2. Landscape Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Landscape Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Landscape Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Landscape Architect and Owner in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log at 25%, 50%, 75%, 90%, and 100% of job completion as determined by the Landscape Architect. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B, including the following:

1. Project name: Meadowlark Botanical Gardens – Entrance Improvements 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Landscape Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Landscape Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Landscape Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Landscape Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.



1.8 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Landscape Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions

and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Landscape Architect, within five (5) days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Landscape Architect, but no later than fifteen (15) days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Landscape Architect, and their

consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Protection of existing landscape. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Phasing. d. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. e. Coordination with other work and avoiding potential conflicts. f. Designation of key personnel and their duties. g. Lines of communications. h. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. i. Procedures for RFIs. j. Procedures for testing and inspecting. k. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. l. Distribution of the Contract Documents. m. Submittal procedures. n. Preparation of record documents. o. Use of the premises. p. Work restrictions. q. Working hours. r. Weather limitations. s. Owner's occupancy requirements. t. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. u. Procedures for moisture and mold control. v. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. w. Construction waste management and recycling. x. Parking availability. y. Office, work, and storage areas. z. Equipment deliveries and priorities.



aa. Security. bb. Progress cleaning. cc. Submittal and mockup reviews. dd. Maintenance and warranty requirements. ee. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Landscape Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Protection of existing landscape. b. Contract Documents. c. Options. d. Related RFIs. e. Related Change Orders. f. Purchases. g. Deliveries. h. Submittals. i. Review of mockups. j. Possible conflicts. k. Compatibility requirements. l. Time schedules. m. Weather limitations. n. Manufacturer's written instructions. o. Warranty requirements. p. Compatibility of materials. q. Acceptability of substrates. r. Temporary facilities and controls. s. Space and access limitations. t. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. u. Testing and inspecting requirements. v. Installation procedures. w. Coordination with other work. x. Required performance results. y. Protection of adjacent work. z. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.



5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Construction Manager will schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Landscape Architect, but no later than 45 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Landscape Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and

for final payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. l. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Construction Manager will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Landscape Architect, each

contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to



do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Status of RFIs. 15) Status of proposal requests. 16) Pending changes. 17) Status of Change Orders. 18) Pending claims and disputes. 19) Documentation of information for payment requests.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

F. Coordination Meetings: Construction Manager will conduct Project coordination meetings as needed. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner Landscape Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: As determined by Construction Manager and Landscape Architect.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.


CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Special reports.


1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 2. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Landscape Architect.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.



D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.


A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file.

B. Startup construction schedule.

1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.

D. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from commencement of the

Work until most recent Application for Payment.



E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

F. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

H. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

I. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including partial Owner occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Secure time commitments for long lead items. 3. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule

them in proper sequence.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of final completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20days, unless specifically allowed by Landscape Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Landscape Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

5. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30days for completion of punch list items and final completion. Final time allowed will be determined by Landscape Architect based on punch list items.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Limitations of continued occupancies. b. Uninterruptible services. c. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. d. Use of premises restrictions. e. Seasonal variations. f. Environmental control.

3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases.



d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion, and the following interim milestones:

1. Installation of brick walls and stone stairs. 2. Installation of brick and concrete paving

E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven (7) days of date established for commencement of the Work.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 30 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

2.3 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site.



3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Work Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.4 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one (1) day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: Update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule two (2) days before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.



3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Landscape Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1

SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final completion construction photographs. 4. Web-based construction photographic documentation.


1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation

as project record documents at Project closeout. 3. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for photographic documentation before site clearing

operations commence.


A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate area of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.

B. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three (3)days of taking photographs.

1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 6 megapixels. 2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio

as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file.

3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag:

a. Name of Project: Meadowlark Botanical Gardens – Entrance Improvements b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Landscape Architect: Rhodeside & Harwell d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken.



f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.

g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.

C. Construction Photographs: Submit electronic copies within three (3) days of taking photographs.

1. Identification: Provide an applied label and text description for each image with the following information:

a. Name of Project: Meadowlark Botanical Gardens – Entrance Improvements b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Landscape Architect: Rhodeside & Harwell d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken if not date stamped by camera. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and

elevation or story of construction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.


A. Photographer Qualifications for Pre and Post construction photos: Not Required.

1.5 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 6 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Photographer: Not Required.

B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location.



C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project

site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Landscape Architect.

D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Landscape Architect.

1. Flag excavation areas before taking construction photographs. 2. Take thirty (30) photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before

starting the Work. 3. Take ten (10) photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to

accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. 4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent

structures, pavements, and improvements.

E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take photographs at 10%, 25%, 50%, 75%, and 90% completion. Photograph all underground work before it is covered up, timed with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

F. Landscape Architect -Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Landscape Architect will instruct Construction Manager about number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken.

G. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take thirty (30) color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. Landscape Architect will inform Construction Manager of desired vantage points.

1. Do not include date stamp.

H. Additional Photographs: Landscape Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum.

1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible. 2. In emergency situations, take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to,

the following:

a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These

photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.



f. Owner's request for special publicity photographs.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Landscape Architect’s responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "Action Submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Landscape Architect’s responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "Informational Submittals."

C. Shop Drawings: drawings, schedules, and diagrams prepared specifically for this project by the Contractor, subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate a portion of the Work.

D. Product Data: illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, manufacturer’s descriptive literature and catalogue data illustrating a material, product or system for a portion of the Work.

E. Samples: physical examples of materials, equipment, assemblies, or workmanship establishing standards for evaluating finished work.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. No portion of the Work shall commence until all related submittals are reviewed by the Landscape Architect.

1. All portions of the Work shall conform to the reviewed submittals.

B. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in order by Specification Section. Include dates required by construction schedule; factor in time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Landscape Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Completion: Submittals shall be complete for each portion of the Work. The Landscape Architect may refuse to act, when submittal acceptability is dependent upon conditions, items, or materials included in separate or subsequent submittals, until sufficient additional information is provided to permit proper evaluation.

2. Format: Identify submittals with the following applicable information permanently adhered to or noted on each submittal:

a. Project title and location. b. Owner’s name and project number. c. Landscape Architect’s name and project number. d. Contractor’s name. e. Related Specification Section. f. Subcontractor’s, vendor’s, and manufacturer’s name, address, and telephone

number. g. Product identification and location in project. h. Applicable drawing and project manual section number references.

3. Review: Submittal review by the Landscape Architect shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility of the following:

a. Submittal errors and omissions. b. Deviations from the Contract Documents, without prior written approval from the

Landscape Architect.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Landscape Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Landscape Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.



B. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Landscape

Architect's action stamp.

C. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Landscape Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Submit electronic submittals, shop drawings, and product data via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Landscape Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:



a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Product name and name of manufacturer. b. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

E. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

G. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

H. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

I. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

J. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of Landscape Architects and owners, and other information specified.

L. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

M. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

N. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Determine and verify all field measurements and field construction criteria, and note corrections and field dimensions.

B. Review each submittal for conformance with the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and operations of construction, and safety precautions and programs incidental thereto, all of which are the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

D. Advise the Landscape Architect in writing of any submittal deviation from the Contract Documents. The Landscape Architect shall assume that no shop drawings or submittals comprises a variation from the Contract Documents unless Contractor advises Landscape Architect otherwise in writing, and receive in writing the approval from the Landscape Architect.

3.2 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. The Landscape Architect shall review and take appropriate action on submittals, shop drawings, product data, and samples required by the Contract Documents. Such review shall be only for general conformance with the design concept and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. It shall not include review of quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes, construction methods, coordination of work with other trades, or construction safety precautions, all of which are the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

B. The Landscape Architect’s review shall be conducted with reasonable promptness consistent with sound professional practice. Review of a specific item shall not indicate acceptance of an assembly of which the item is a component. The Landscape Architect shall not be required to review or be responsible for any deviation from the Contract Documents not clearly noted by the Contractor. Nor shall the Landscape Architect be required to review partial submissions or those for which submissions for correlated items have not been reviewed.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control, including:

1. Testing and inspection services 2. Mockups 3. Constructors’ qualifications 4. Quality control plan

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Landscape Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Landscape Architect.



C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

2. Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five (5)previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Landscape Architect for a decision before proceeding.



B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Landscape Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.

B. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee



payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of



manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Landscape Architect.

2. Notify Landscape Architect seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project.

4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Landscape Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or

construction.

a. Allow three (3) days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

K. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to approved Shop Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with supporting materials.

1.8 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.



a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Landscape Architect , Construction Manager, and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Landscape Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.



3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Landscape Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Landscape Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.


TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 015639 - 1

SECTION 015639 - TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general protection and pruning of existing trees and plants that are affected by execution of the Work, whether temporary or permanent construction.


1. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for removing existing trees and shrubs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Caliper: Diameter of a trunk measured by a diameter tape at a height 6 inches (150 mm) above the ground for trees up to and including 4-inch (100-mm) size at this height and as measured at a height of 12 inches (300 mm) above the ground for trees larger than 4-inch (100-mm) size.

B. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction and indicated on Drawings.

C. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site with Landscape Architect and Owner.

1. Review methods and procedures related to temporary tree and plant protection including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Engaging a certified Arborist if required. b. Existing condition of trees and proximity of proposed Work. c. Coordination of Work and equipment movement with the locations of protection

zones. d. Trenching by hand or with air-spade within protection zones. e. Field quality control.




A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings indicated to remain, which establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by construction activities.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each

tree or other plants designated to remain.

B. Product Data: For each type of product


A. Arborist Qualifications (if required by Landscape Architect and Owner): Licensed arborist in jurisdiction where Project is located.

B. Quality-Control Program: Prepare a written program to systematically demonstrate the ability of personnel to properly follow procedures and handle materials and equipment during the Work without damaging trees and plantings. Include dimensioned diagrams for placement of protection zone fencing and signage, the arborist's and tree-service firm's responsibilities, instructions given to workers on the use and care of protection zones, and enforcement of requirements for protection zones.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Moving or parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Heavy foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

B. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust toward protection zones.

C. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones and organic mulch.

D. Contractor shall not prune crown of trees.

E. The results of poor protection may not show for a number of years following the completion of the Work, therefore, the health of the trees and condition of the soil in the protection zone as indicated on the Demolition and Tree Preservation Plan, is warrantied for two (2) years.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Backfill Soil: Stockpiled soil of suitable moisture content and granular texture for placing around tree; free of stones, roots, plants, sod, clods, clay lumps, pockets of coarse sand, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

B. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing for trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following:

1. Type: Ground or shredded hardwood bark 2. Size Range: 3 inches (76 mm) maximum, 1/2 inch (13 mm) minimum 3. Color: Natural.

C. Protection-Zone Fencing: Fencing fixed in position and meeting the following requirements: Previously used materials may be used when approved by Landscape Architect.

1. Wood Protection-Zone Fencing: Constructed of two 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) horizontal rails, with 4-by-4-inch (100-by-100-mm) preservative-treated wood posts spaced not more than 96 inches (2400 mm) apart, and lower rail set halfway between top rail and ground.

a. Height: 48 inches (1200 mm) b. Lumber: Whole, unsplintered, and free of cracks that could lessen the durability of

the fence or present a safety hazard. c. Fencing: Plastic construction fencing, high-visibility orange; secured to wood

posts and rails with plastic bands, galvanized steel or stainless steel wire ties, or heavy duty staples.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Examine the site to verify that temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures are in place. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate with Landscape Architect and Owner prior to installation of tree protection fencing to verify any special preservation or protection requirements.

B. Locate and clearly identify trees to remain. Tie a 1-inch (25-mm) blue vinyl tape around each tree trunk at 54 inches (1372 mm) above the ground.



C. Protect tree root systems from damage caused by runoff or spillage of noxious materials while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from ponding, eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.

D. Tree-Protection Zones: Mulch areas inside tree-protection zones and other areas indicated. Do not exceed indicated thickness of mulch.

1. Apply 2-inch (50-mm) uniform thickness of organic mulch unless otherwise indicated. Do not place mulch within 6 inches (150 mm) of tree trunks.

3.3 PROTECTION ZONES

A. Protection-Zone Fencing: Install protection-zone fencing along edges of protection zones in a manner that will prevent people from easily entering protected areas except by entrance gates. Construct fencing so as not to obstruct safe passage or visibility at vehicle intersections where fencing is located adjacent to pedestrian walkways or in close proximity to street intersections, drives, or other vehicular circulation.

1. Posts: Set or drive posts into ground one-third the total height of the fence without concrete footings.

B. Maintain protection zones free of weeds and trash.

C. Maintain protection-zone fencing and signage in good condition as acceptable to Architect and remove when construction operations are complete and equipment has been removed from the site.

1. Do not remove protection-zone fencing, even temporarily, to allow deliveries or equipment access through the protection zone.

3.4 EXCAVATION

A. General: Excavate at edge of protection zones and for trenches indicated within protection zones according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth Moving" unless otherwise indicated.

B. Redirect roots in backfill areas where possible. If encountering large, main lateral roots, expose roots beyond excavation limits as required to bend and redirect them without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and redirection is not practical, cut roots approximately 3 inches (75 mm) back from new construction and as required for root pruning.

C. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain in a moist condition. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and covered with soil.



3.5 ROOT PRUNING

A. Prune tree roots that are affected by temporary and permanent construction. Prune roots as follows:

1. Cut roots manually by digging a trench and cutting exposed roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not break, tear, chop, or slant the cuts. Do not use a backhoe or other equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Cut Ends: Do not paint cut root ends. 3. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently redirected

and covered with soil. 4. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 5. Backfill as soon as possible according to requirements in Section 312000 "Earth

Moving."

B. Root Pruning at Edge of Protection Zone: Prune tree roots 4 inches (100 mm) outside of the protection zone by cleanly cutting all roots to the depth of the required excavation.

3.6 REGRADING

A. Lowering Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated below existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.

B. Lowering Grade within Protection Zone: Grading within tree protection areas is not allowed.

C. Raising Grade: Where new finish grade is indicated above existing grade around trees, slope grade beyond the protection zone. Maintain existing grades within the protection zone.

D. Minor Fill within Protection Zone: Grading within tree protection areas is not allowed.

3.7 REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

A. General: Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Architect.

1. Submit details of proposed pruning and repairs. 2. Perform repairs of damaged trunks, branches, and roots within 24 hours according to

arborist's written instructions. 3. Replace trees and other plants that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status,

as determined by Architect.

B. Trees: Remove and replace trees indicated to remain that are more than 25percent dead or in an unhealthy condition before the date of substantial completion, or are damaged during construction operations that Landscape Architect or Owner determines are incapable of restoring to normal growth pattern.

1. Small Trees: Provide new trees of same size and species as those being replaced for each tree that measures 6 inches (150 mm) or smaller in caliper size.



2. Large Trees: Provide one new tree(s) of 6-inch (150-mm) caliper size for each tree being replaced that measures more than 6 inches (150 mm) in caliper size.

a. Species: As determined by Landscape Architect.

C. Excess Mulch: Rake mulched area within protection zones, being careful not to injure roots. Rake to loosen and remove mulch that exceeds a 2-inch (50-mm) > uniform thickness to remain.

D. Soil Aeration: Where directed by Architect, aerate surface soil compacted during construction. Aerate 10 feet (3 m) beyond drip line and no closer than 36 inches (900 mm) to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch- (50-mm-)diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) deep at 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augured soil and sand.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Division 01 Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.



1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.

2. Landscape Architect's Action: If necessary, Landscape Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Landscape Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Landscape Architect does not issue a decision on use of a

comparable product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Submit manufacturer’s standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers’ standard data to provide information specific to this Project. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.



4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warrant for a one-year period (unless another period is specified for a particular item) commencing on the date of Substantial Completion:

B. Warrant that the work contains no faulty or imperfect material or equipment or any imperfect, careless, or unskilled workmanship.

C. Warrant that all work, utility systems, equipment, machines, devices, plant materials, and all other work shall be adequate for the use to which they are intended, and shall operate or survive with ordinary care and attention in a satisfactory and efficient manner.

D. Re-execute, correct, repair, or remove and replace with proper Work, without cost to the Owner, any Work found by the Owner not to be as warranted by this section. Repair all damages caused to other work or materials in the process of complying with this Section.

E. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

F. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. See Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

G. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Landscape Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.



5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Landscape Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Landscape Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Landscape Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

a. In the event that the Landscape Architect is required to consider a product as a Comparable Product, even though said product requires revisions to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall assume all costs associated with changes to any and all affected aspects of the Contract Documents, including plan and detail revisions, specification revisions, documentation of compatibility, calculations, and permitting. Further, the Contractor shall provide revised Contract Drawings, signed and sealed by all applicable licensed, certified or registered professions, at the Contractor’s expense.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of Landscape Architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.




EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with

Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.


A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor or professional engineer.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor or professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.



1. Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted.

a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.

C. Certified Surveys: Submit two (2) copies signed by land surveyor or professional engineer.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Landscape Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Landscape Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Tree roots.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Landscape Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Landscape Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

a. Submit these materials to the Landscape Architect no less than five (5) working days in advance of their proposed use in the project using contract submittal procedures described in Division 01 Section “Submittal Procedures”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: Before beginning any work of this Contract, carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with existing conditions at the Project site and report immediately in writing to the Landscape Architect if any errors, inconsistencies, or omissions are discovered. Do not proceed with any work in such areas until written instructions are received from the Landscape Architect.

B. Existing Subsurface Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

a. Before beginning any excavation, contact public utility locator: Miss Utility 1-800-257-7777 (MD & VA) at least three (3) working days prior to starting work so that utility locator may mark horizontal locations of underground utilities.

b. If public utility locator will not or is not able to verify horizontal locations of utilities or provide Contractor with sufficient utility information, Contractor is responsible for retaining the services of a private utility locator at Contractor’s expense.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.



3. Notify Landscape Architect immediately if discovered conditions differ from conditions as shown in the Contract Documents.

C. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

D. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before preparation of shop drawings or fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Landscape Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."



3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Landscape Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Landscape Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed

allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established

by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Landscape Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Landscape Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Landscape Architect before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two (2)permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.



3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Landscape Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.



3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Tree Roots: Use sharp pruning tools – do not break, tar, or chop. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section “Temporary Tree and Soil Protection”.

3. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 4. Concrete Masonry and Paved Surfaces: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive

saw or a diamond-core drill. 5. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31

Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 6. Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap,

valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

7. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.



1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Paved Surfaces: Patch paved surfaces and / or pave to abut existing paved surfaces providing smooth and consistent transitions. Abrupt changes in grade or line will not be accepted.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with all federal, state, and local waste disposal requirements.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.



E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.

F. Repair to the satisfaction of the Owner and Utility Owner, any damage to any utility caused by Contractor’s work.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation.

2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record

Specifications, and record Product Data. 4. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements

for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and other similar documents. 3. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 6. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 7. Complete “Final Cleaning” requirements.



B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Landscape Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Landscape Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Landscape Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items (Punch List): Submit certified copy of Landscape Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Landscape Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. 5. Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Landscape Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Landscape Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name: Meadowlark Botanical Gardens – Entrance Improvements b. Date.



c. Name of Landscape Architect: Rhodeside & Harwell d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

3. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. Landscape Architect will return annotated file.

1.6 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Division 1 Section “Submittal Procedures”

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove labels that are not permanent.

f. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. g. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.



B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Landscape Architect and Owner will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:



1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Landscape Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least twenty (20) working days before commencing demonstration and training. Landscape Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least ten (10) working days before commencing demonstration and training. Landscape Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Landscape Architect's and Owner’s comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within ten (10) days of receipt of Landscape Architect's and Owner’s comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."



2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Landscape Architect. 8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Landscape Architect that

designed the systems contained in the manuals. 9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

D. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards.



4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped/Conduit system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Routine and normal operating instructions. 3. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped/Conduit Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number.



2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.



5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.



D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents."

E. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.


1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 4. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents

of the Work in those Sections.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one (1) of file prints.

2) Landscape Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit three (3) paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and three (3) set(s) of

prints.



3) Print each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Reports: Submit written report bi-weekly indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic

documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Locations of concealed internal utilities. h. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. i. Changes made following Landscape Architect's written orders. j. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. k. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. l. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.



3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Landscape Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows:

1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Landscape Architect for resolution.

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Landscape Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

2. Consult Landscape Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files

that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name: Meadowlark Botanical Gardens – Entrance Improvements b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Landscape Architect: Rhodeside & Harwell e. Name of Contractor.



2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.



B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Landscape Architect's reference during normal working hours.



CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 1

SECTION 03 300 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings. 2. Slab on grade

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.




A. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Bonding agents. 7. Adhesives. 8. Repair materials.

B. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:

1. Aggregates

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."



E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete subcontractor. e. Special concrete finish subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, , anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.



2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I/II

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag cement.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.



2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

2. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 3. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 5. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent

portland cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.

B. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Walls and Foundations: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated on drawings 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45 3. Air Content: 5.5> percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch

nominal maximum aggregate size. 4. Air Content: 6> percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 3/4-inch

nominal maximum aggregate size.

2.9 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.10 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.



1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class B, 1/4 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

G. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete. Chamfer dimensions to match existing.

H. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

I. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

J. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

K. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.



3.2 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,

near corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.



3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators

vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

E. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.6 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.



B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3.7 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joint clean and dry.



3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces Stone Stairs.

C. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.9 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than

1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,

honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or



that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Verification of use of required design mixture. 3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 4. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.



D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: As indicated on drawings

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; ASTM C 173/C 173M, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

7. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.



12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.



UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1

SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Face brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Ties and anchors. 5. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for wall footings. 2. Division 32 Section "Unit Paving" for exterior brick and unit concrete paving. 3. Division 04 Section “Stone Masonry” for stone caps on entrance walls

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.



B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.

Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Weep holes/vents.



D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Pigmented mortar. To match existing. Submit sample mortar strips, 6” (150mm) long by

½” (12mm) wide, set in aluminum or plastic channels. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project.

a. Include with each sample a list of ingredients with proportion of each. Identify sources, both supplier and quarry, or each type of sand and brand names of cementitious materials and pigments if any.

b. Mortar should be pre-mixed.

3. Weep holes. 4. Accessories embedded in masonry.


A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Landscape Architect and approved in writing.

B. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.

a. Include data on material properties, and material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances.

c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. d. For surface-coated brick, include test report for durability of surface appearance

after 50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67.

2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

C. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

D. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.




A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.

B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

E. Mockup Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.

1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 48 inches (1200 mm) long by 24 inches (600mm) high by full thickness.

2. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 3. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units;

relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Landscape Architect in writing.

a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Landscape Architect in writing.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver pre-blended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with dispensing silos. Store pre-blended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.



E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls and hold cover securely in place.

2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.



B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

B. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of as indicated.

2. Density Classification: Normal weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Landscape

Architect's sample.

2.3 MASONRY LINTELS

A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured.

2.4 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing.

3. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Redland Brick Inc.; 15718 Clear Spring Road, P.O. Box 160, Williamsport, MD 21795 – (301)-223-7700. www.redlandbrick.com/brick-dealers-locator.asp

2. Thickness: 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) 3. Face Size: 3-5/8 by 7-5/8 inches (92 by 194 mm)



4. Color: King William Antique – 410

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.

F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.

J. Water: Potable.

2.6 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Exterior Walls: Stainless steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm diameter. 4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.187-inch (4.76-mm) diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.



C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.

D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:

1. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with 1 side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face.

2. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal wire in the facing wythe.

2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.

1. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304 2. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer.

C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm) wide.

1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches (50 mm) long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units.

2. Where wythes do not align or are of different materials, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

3. Wire: Fabricate from 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, stainless-steel wire.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Weep/Vent Products: Use one of the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/4 inch (19 mm) OD by length Indicated in Drawings.

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.



1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817.

b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; #RB or #RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner.

2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N.

D. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.

1. Mix to match Visitors Center building. 2. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following

units:

a. Face brick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work.



2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.3 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, caps, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

2. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 7/16 inch (14 mm).

2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.



B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond as indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on

footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on

footings where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and

parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings

and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.



C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.7 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. General: Install expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in-plane wall or partition movement.

B. Form expansion joints in brick as follows:

1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any.

C. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm).

1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry.

3.8 WEEP HOLES

A. Install weep holes where Indicated in Drawings and as follows:

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes as indicated. 3. Use open head joints between masonry units to form weep holes.

3.9 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.



C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength.

F. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

G. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

H. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.

I. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

J. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at seven (7) days and at twenty-eight (28) days.

3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.



B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Landscape Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.

8. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions. 9. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone

Handbook."

3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches (100 mm) in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of

masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches (450 mm) of finished grade.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.



STONE MASONRY 044300 - 1

SECTION 044300 - STONE MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following applications of stone masonry:

1. Bluestone wall caps. 2. Stone Stairs.


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for footings for walls and stone stairs. 2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for brick wall construction.



B. Samples for Verification:

1. For each stone type indicated. Include at least three (3) samples in each set for each type of stone, exhibiting extremes of the full range of color and other visual characteristics expected in completed Work. Samples will establish the standard by which stone provided will be judged.

2. For each color of grout required. Provide color options from Manufacturer’s full range for Landscape Architect to select.


A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, sources of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and source of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockups constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Landscape Architect and approved in writing.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.




A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs experienced stonemasons and stone fitters.

B. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain bluestone, from one quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.


A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed stone masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides and hold cover securely in place.

B. Stain Prevention: Immediately remove mortar and soil to prevent them from staining the face of stone masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by coverings spread on the ground and over the wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and

integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at end of each day to prevent rain from

splashing mortar and dirt on completed stone masonry.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace stone masonry damaged by frost or freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BLUESTONE

A. Provide sound natural stone as follows:

1. Basis of Design: Johnston & Rhodes Bluestone Company, P.O Box 130, 1 Bridge Street, East Branch, NY 13756.



a. Product: Blue Thermal b. Color Range: Blue/Blue – exclusively blues and grays (occurrences of stains,

streaks, white-veining, and rust are unacceptable). c. Finish: Thermal top and edges d. Shape: Stone Stairs cut radially as indicated on Drawings – ½” radius bullnose on

exposed edges. Bluestone wall caps cut as indicated on Drawings – ½” radius bullnose of exposed edges.

e. Size: As indicated on Drawings

2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Low-Alkali Cement: Not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114.


C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of Portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207 containing no other ingredients

D. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.

E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

F. Aggregate: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

G. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.

H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

I. Water: Potable.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors: Provide anchoring system and supports as follows,



1. Dowels: Type 316 stainless steel of the sizes indicated in the Drawings as required for strength, alignment, and permanent anchorage.

2.4 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from stone masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer.

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. Prosoco, Inc.

2.5 MORTAR MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to

view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Stone Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide Type N unless otherwise indicated.

D. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.

1. Mix to match existing joints and Landscape Architect’s approved sample.

2. Application: Used colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:

a. Bluestone wall caps. b. Stone stairs.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate stone to comply with sizes, shapes, and tolerances recommended by applicable stone association or, if none, by stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs.



B. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details on approved Shop Drawings. Dress joints (bed and vertical) straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors and supports.

D. Carefully inspect stone at quarry or fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units before shipment.

1. Clean sawed backs of stone to remove rust stains and iron particles.

E. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings.

F. Fabrication Tolerances:

1. General: Tolerances apply after finishing. 2. For conventional set stone:

a. Thickness: +1/8 inch (+3mm), -1/16 inch (-1.5mm) b. Length and Height: 1/16 inch (1.5mm) over entire unit c. Deviation from flat plane, or plane of indicated radius, on exposed face in any

direction: To meet 1% slope, no greater. d. Deviation from Square: 1/8 inch (3mm)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive stone masonry, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine substrate to verify that dovetail slots, inserts, reinforcement, veneer anchors, flashing, and other items installed in substrates and required for or extending into stone masonry are correctly installed.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials before setting. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives.



3.3 SETTING OF STONE MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings. Install supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone masonry in place. Set stone accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.

B. Provide sealant joints of widths and at locations indicated.

1. Keep sealant joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Sealing joints is specified in Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants."

3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more.

B. Variation in Mortar-Joint Thickness: Do not vary from joint size range indicated.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORED STONE MASONRY

A. Anchor stone masonry with stainless steel dowels as indicated in the Drawings.

1. Extent of anchorage and installation details indicated are minimum requirements. Provide additional anchorage where necessitated by size, thickness, fitting, or shape as required to fulfill performance requirements.

3.6 POINTING

A. Prepare stone-joint surfaces for pointing with grout by removing dust and mortar particles. Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) deep until a uniform depth is formed.

B. Point stone joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer.

C. Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to produce the following joint profile:

1. Joint Profile: Concave.

3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace stone masonry of the following description:

1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Landscape Architect.



2. Defective joints. 3. Stone masonry not matching approved samples and mockups. 4. Stone masonry not matching approved shop drawings. 5. Stone masonry not complying with other requirements indicated.

B. Replace in a manner that results in stone masonry matching approved samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean stone masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean stone masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on mockup; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Landscape Architect's approval of sample cleaning before cleaning stone masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent, polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaner; remove cleaner promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean stone masonry with proprietary acidic cleaner approved by the Landscape Architect and applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.



DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS 057300 - 1

SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Galvanized Steel Handrails at Stone Stairs.


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for footing conditions. 2. Division 04 Section “Stone Masonry” for stone stairs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided floor areas, pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design railings to conform to the following loads and stresses, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:

1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.

C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Handrails:

a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.




A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. 2. Non-shrink, non-metallic grout, galvanized post sleeve, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of powdercoat color, texture, or design.


A. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying shop primers are compatible with topcoats.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not suit structural performance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Galvanized Steel Handrail and Escutcheons

a. Blum, Julius & Co., Inc.



b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.

B. Sleeves: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 STEEL

A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Low-Emitting Paints and Coatings: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Universal Latex Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

E. Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI#77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.

F. Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI#72 and compatible with undercoat.

G. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.



C. Cut metals cleanly and accurately. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.

F. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces to be smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after welding, and no evidence of adjoining surfaces at welded joint exists.

G. Form changes in direction as follows:

1. As detailed. 2. By radius bends of radius indicated.

H. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

I. For railing posts set in concrete, provide galvanized steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure.

2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanized Railings:

1. Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron railings, after fabrication. 2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.



3. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

4. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and other ferrous components.

C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

D. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

E. Powder-Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat galvanized metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Prepare galvanized metal by thoroughly removing grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter.

2. Treat prepared metal with zinc-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces. 3. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film

thickness not less than 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). 4. Color: Provide to match color specified in Division 12 Section “Site Furnishings” for

proposed pole lights by Architectural Area Lighting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify conditions for post embedment are acceptable.


A. Install in accordance with shop drawings as approved by Landscape Architect.

B. Erect work square and level, horizontal or parallel to rake of steps and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

C. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).



3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.

3.4 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Cover anchorage joint with escutcheon of same metal as post, attached to post with set screws.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and wiping dry.

1. Do not use acid solution, steel wool, or other harsh abrasives.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.



SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 1

SECTION 129300 - SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pole lights.


1. Section 260519 “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for electrical connections to pole lights.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimension of individual components and profiles, finishes, field assembly requirements, and installation details.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POLE LIGHTS

A. Manufacturer: Architectural Area Lighting 1. Address: 16555 East Gale Avenue 2. Phone: 1-626-968-5666

B. Fixture Model: UCM-ANG-T3-32LED-4K-700-MG-SLA7-120-277 1. Material: 22” Diameter Aluminum Hood – Angled (UCM-ANG) 2. Finish: Medium Grey 3. Source Type: Type 3 Distribution – 32LED @ 4K Temperature 4. Pole Mount: SLA7 – Medium Grey (24” W x 54” H)

C. Pole Model: PR44R8-226-PTA-BC1-MG-ABT-RBC 1. Material: Aluminum 2. Size: 4” Round x 8’ High 3. Finish: Medium Grey 4. Base: BC1 – Medium Grey


SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 2

D. Banner Arms: BBS4-24-MG 1. Size: For 4” O.D Pole, 24” Arm Length

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

B. Install pole lights level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings.

C. Install pole lights following the completion of all construction to avoid damage to poles or fixtures during Work.

D. Install pole lights so that the fixtures are all turned in at the angle as indicated on Drawings.



LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1

SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.


A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Belden Inc. 2. Encore Wire Corporation.



3. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 4. Southwire Incorporated.

B. Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.

C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2.

D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire.

2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Gardner Bender. 3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. 4. Ideal Industries, Inc. 5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. 6. NSi Industries LLC. 7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. 9. Tyco Electronics.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.

B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.



3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS

A. Exposed Feeders: Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

B. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

C. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

D. Feeders Installed below Raised Flooring: Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits: Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Metal-clad cable, Type MC.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

H. Branch Circuits Installed below Raised Flooring: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway.

I. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless-steel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.

B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables.

C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

F. Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

G. Complete cable tray systems installation according to Section 260536 "Cable Trays for Electrical Systems" prior to installing conductors and cables.



3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.

3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 260544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."

3.7 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Procedures used. 2. Results that comply with requirements. 3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

D. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


SITE CLEARING 3311000 - 1

SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing or maintaining site utilities. 7. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures. 8. Salvaging existing benches.


1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for field engineering and surveying. 2. Division 01 Section “Temporary Tree and Plant Protection” for protecting, trimming,

pruning, repairing, and replacing existing trees to remain that interfere with, or are affected by, the execution of the Work.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.

D. Plant-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

E. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.



F. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.


A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each

tree or other plants designated to remain.


A. Existing Conditions:

1. Contract includes all demolition required to construct new work, including applicable permits or fees for demolition or disposal. Completely remove and dispose of items from site in accordance with local laws. Do not burn or bury any demolished items on site.

2. Demolition and tree preservation drawings are provided for the contractor’s convenience, and to identify existing items which shall remain in-place and which the contractor shall protect, and to identify items which the contractor shall salvage within the limits of work. Contractor is responsible for visiting the site prior to bidding to verify demolition requirements.

3. Notify the Landscape Architect immediately if existing conditions differ from conditions as shown on drawings.

B. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service, Miss Utility, or utility service having jurisdiction, for area where Project is located before site clearing.

D. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and tree-protection measures are in place and approved by the landscape architect.

1. Protect trees according to the requirements set forth in Division 01 Section “Temporary Tree and Plant Protection” and tree preservation sheets in the drawings.



E. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

F. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the soil is dry or slightly moist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

B. Antirust Coating: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, self-curing, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI #79, Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer

1. Use coating with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 lb/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Verify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain or to be relocated have been flagged and that protection zones have been identified and erected in accordance with the requirement set forth in Division 01 Section “Temporary Tree and Plant Protection”.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Landscape Architect and Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and in compliance with VDOT erosion and sediment control procedures.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.



C. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter open curb inlets. Curb inlet protection measures should comply with VDOT erosion and sediment control procedures.

D. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

E. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.

3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in accordance with the requirements set forth in Division 01 Section “Temporary Tree and Plant Protection”.

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner and Landscape Architect not less than three (3) days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission.

B. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed, and maintain underground utilities indicated to remain.

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation approved by the Landscape Architect to permit installation of new construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. 2. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 18 inches

(450 mm) below exposed subgrade. 3. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.

1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches (200 mm), and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.



3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to depth encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and non-soil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches (50 mm) in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches (1800 mm). 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. 3. Stockpile soil at on-site location indicated by Owner. 4. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be stockpiled or reused. All

surplus topsoil is to be transported and stored at a location indicated by Owner or Landscape Architect.

5. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for re-spreading deeper topsoil.

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed.


A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Transport surplus soil and topsoil material to location designated by Owner or Landscape Architect.

C. Burning of tree, shrub, or other vegetation and deleterious material waste is not permitted.

D. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.



E. Do not allow demolished material waste to accumulate on site.

F. Remove and transport debris and waste is a manner that will prevent damage or spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

3.9 SALVAGING OF EXISTING BENCHES

A. Carefully remove benches without damage and harm prior to any other site clearing measures.

1. Notify Owner and Landscape Architect not less than three (3) days in advance of removal to allow preparations be made for bench storage as determined by Owner.



EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1

SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, 2. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 3. Subbase course for concrete walks, pavements. 4. Subbase course and base course, for asphalt repair. 5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls. 6. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.


1. Division 01 Sections "Construction Progress Documentation and Photographic Documentation" for recording pre-excavation and earth moving progress.

2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

3. Division 32 Section "Soil Preparation" for finish grading in planting areas.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.



F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Landscape Architect.

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and more than 30 feet (9 m) in length.

3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Landscape Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Landscape Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m)for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:

1. Equipment for Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- (1065-mm-) wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp (103-kW) flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,700 lbf (128 kN) and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,400 lbf (82 kN) with extra-long reach boom.

2. Equipment for Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 230-hp (172-kW) flywheel power and developing a minimum of 47,992-lbf (213.3-kN) breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.

I. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. (0.57 cu. m) or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches (97 blows/50 mm) when tested by a geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586.

J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

K. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

L. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

M. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.




A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Geotextiles. 2. Controlled low-strength material, including design mixture.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

B. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698.


A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Standards:

a. Virginia Department of Transportation (VDOT) current “Road and Bridge Specification”

b. Virginia Test Methods Manual (VTM), current edition. c. Fairfax County Building Design and Construction Division regulations.

B. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Utility Locator Service: Notify “Miss Utility" for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations.

1. Existing water, stormwater, and sanitary line depths must be verified before any excavation begins. Conflicts found between depth of utilities and proposed work should be brought to the attention of the Owner and Landscape Architect immediately.



C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner or Landscape Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner and Landscape Architect not less than three (3) days in advance of proposed utility interruptions

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s and Landscape Architect’s written permission.

3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project site is located before excavating.

D. Do not commence earth moving operations until plant-protection measures specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" are in place.

1. See aforementioned Section to review practices prohibited within protection zones.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

1. Wet soils, which are otherwise suitable, are not considered as unsuitable soils. Contractor shall bring these soils to within +/- 2% of optimum moisture content at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. Stockpile soil at on-site location indicated by Owner.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: In accordance with VDOT Specification Section 208.

E. Base Course: In accordance with VDOT Specification Section 208.

F. Engineered Fill: Subbase or Base material.

G. Bedding Course: Coarse, open graded gravel or crushed stone meeting the requirements for VDOT No.57 coarse aggregate.

H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed, crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.



I. Filter Material: Narrowly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 67; with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 4 (4.75-mm) sieve.

J. Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M; fine aggregate.

K. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 GEOTEXTILES

A. Subsurface Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Survivability as follows:

a. Grab Tensile Strength: 157 lbf (700 N); ASTM D 4632. b. Sewn Seam Strength: 142 lbf (630 N); ASTM D 4632. c. Tear Strength: 56 lbf (250 N); ASTM D 4533. d. Puncture Strength: 56 lbf (250 N); ASTM D 4833.

3. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 4. Permittivity: 0.5per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 5. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

B. Separation Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric, manufactured for separation applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation less than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2; AASHTO M 288. 2. Survivability as follows:

a. Grab Tensile Strength: 247 lbf (1100 N); ASTM D 4632. b. Sewn Seam Strength: 222 lbf (990 N); ASTM D 4632. c. Tear Strength: 90 lbf (400 N); ASTM D 4533. d. Puncture Strength: 90 lbf (400 N); ASTM D 4833.

3. Apparent Opening Size: No. 60 (0.250-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 4. Permittivity: 0.02 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 5. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure; ASTM D 4355.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric.



2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Notify Landscape Architect to assess the health of existing trees and to determine root pruning measures. Complete all Tree protection measures including root pruning and install tree protection fencing before any operations commence.

B. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

C. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

D. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.



a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.

2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions:

a. 24 inches (600 mm) outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches (300 mm) outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches (150 mm) outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast

against grade. d. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade. e. 6 inches (150 mm) beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches (600 mm)

wider than pipe or 42 inches (1065 mm) wide.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Excavate by airspade to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.



B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

1. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches (150 mm) in nominal diameter, hand-excavate trench bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

2. For pipes and conduit 6 inches (150 mm) or larger in nominal diameter, shape bottom of trench to support bottom 90 degrees of pipe or conduit circumference. Fill depressions with tamped sand backfill.

3. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Landscape Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Landscape Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Landscape Architect, without additional compensation.

3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil at on-site location indicated by Owner.

3.10 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris.



6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.

D. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.

E. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

F. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place initial backfill of controlled low-strength material to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

H. Controlled Low-Strength Material: Place final backfill of controlled low-strength material to final subgrade elevation.

I. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.12 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.



C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

3.13 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.14 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85percent.

3.15 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).



3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.

3.16 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as in accordance with VDOT Section 308 and 309.

3.17 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place drainage course 6 inches (150 mm) or less in compacted thickness in a single layer. 3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of

equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.18 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Landscape Architect; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.




A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Landscape Architect.

1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 1

SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hot-mix asphalt patching and repair.


1. Division 03 Section "Site Clearing" for demolition and removal of existing asphalt pavements.

2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase and base courses. 3. Division 32 Sections for other paving installed as part of crosswalks in asphalt pavement

areas. 4. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at

paving terminations.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

1. Job-Mix Designs: For each job mix proposed for the Work.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer and testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer. Include statement for mixes containing recycled materials that performance of recycled material will perform equal to or exceed mixes produced by new materials.

C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material, by a qualified testing agency




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by VDOT.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of VDOT for asphalt paving work.

1. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in standard specifications do not apply to this Section.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements set forth in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.”.

1. Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.

b. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic during installation period and for remainder of construction period.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C). 2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C). 3. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D 3910. 4. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and rising

at time of placement. 5. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F (15.6 deg C) at time

of placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations.

B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.



C. Fine Aggregate: AASHTO M 29, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.

1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass.

D. Mineral Filler: AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320, PG 64-22..

B. Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027, medium-curing cutback asphalt, MC-30 or MC-70.

C. Tack Coat: AASHTO M 140 emulsified asphalt, or AASHTO M 208 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

D. Water: Potable.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 6690, hot-applied, single-component, polymer-modified bituminous sealant.

1. For sealing cracks in hot-mix asphalt, use Type II sealer. 2. For sealing cracks in hot-mix asphalt ‘saw-and-seal’ applications, use Type IV sealer.

2.4 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt as specified by VDOT Road and Bridge standards, and complying with the following requirements:

1. Base Course: 19M64. 2. Surface Course: 9.5M64.

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D 3910, Type 2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.

B. Proof-roll subgrade below pavements with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).



2. Proof roll with a loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes).

3. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Landscape Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches (300 mm) into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Re-compact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

C. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

B. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd. (0.7 to 2.3 L/sq. m). Apply enough material to penetrate and seal but not flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure.

1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.

2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.

C. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd. (0.2 to 0.7 L/sq. m).

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.



3.4 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F (121 deg C). 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of

one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and

tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.5 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions, with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm). 4. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive

displacement. 5. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

3.6 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F (85 deg C).

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density: 96 percent of reference laboratory density according to AASHTO T 245, but not less than 94 percent nor greater than 100 percent.



2. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/2 inch (6 mm), no minus.

B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.8 SURFACE TREATMENTS

A. Slurry Seals: Apply slurry coat in a uniform thickness according to ASTM D 3910 and allow to cure.

1. Roll slurry seal to remove ridges and provide a uniform, smooth surface.

3.9 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.



CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1

SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Curbs and gutters. 2. Walks.


1. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in isolation, expansion and contraction joints within concrete paving and concrete base under unit pavers and in joints between concrete paving and asphalt paving or adjacent construction.

2. Division 32 Section “Unit Paving” for detectable warning pavers in concrete curb ramps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.



B. Other Action Submittals:

1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer and testing agency.

B. Material Certificates: For the following, signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials complies with requirements:



1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Fiber reinforcement. 4. Admixtures. 5. Curing compounds. 6. Applied finish materials. 7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 8. Joint fillers.

C. Material Test Reports: For each of the following:

1. Aggregates.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities".

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

D. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M), “Specification for Structural Concrete” unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups of full-thickness sections of concrete paving to demonstrate one of each typical joints; surface finish, texture, and color; curing; and standard of workmanship.

2. Build mockups of concrete paving to a minimum size of 5’ x 5’. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Landscape Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.



F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements set forth in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.” Before submitting design mixtures:

1. Review methods and procedures related to concrete paving, including but not limited to, the following:

a. Concrete mixture design. b. Quality control of concrete materials and concrete paving construction practices.

2. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with concrete paving to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete paving subcontractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASE MATERIALS: Reference Division 31 Section “Earth Moving”.

2.2 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet (30.5 m) or less.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.


A. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn-steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.

D. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60 plain-steel bars. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

E. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.



F. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A, internally and externally threaded. Design hook-bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against paving form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.

G. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows:

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

H. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating, compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement.

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Portland cement Type I or as required to match existing conditions.

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. 2. Use normal weight fine aggregates that conform to ASTM C33.

C. ADD ALTERNATE #1: Exposed Aggregate Surface: Selected, hard, and durable; washed; free of materials with deleterious reactivity to cement or that cause staining; from a single source, with gap-graded coarse aggregate as follows:

1. Integral Aggregate Source, Shape, and Color (to match existing):

a. Angular crushed granite or basalt (deep grey); 1/2 to 3/4 inch (13 to 19 mm) – 80% b. Water worn pee gravel (tan and white); 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) – 20%

2. Surface Retarder for Exposed Aggregate Surface:

a. Product: Spray applied horizontal concrete surface retarder, water-soluble b. Manufacturers: Shall have ISO 9001 Quality Certification, all products by same

manufacturer to ensure compatibility,

1) Euclid Chemical 2) Dayton Superior



c. Provide 1/16 inch (2 mm) depth retardation (etch depth)

D. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

F. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain no more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) dry or cotton mats.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film-forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

E. White, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B, dissipating.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork in preformed strips.

B. Bond Break Membrane: Polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils (0.1 mm) thick, or unperforated asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15).

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.



B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi (27.6 MPa). 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.50 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm), plus or minus 1 inch.

C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.30 percent by weight of cement.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture or plasticizing and retarding admixture in concrete as required for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

E. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than Portland cement in concrete as outlined in the requirements of ACI 301 for concrete exposed to de-icing chemicals.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine exposed subgrades and subbase surfaces for compliance with requirements for dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.

B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Completely proof-roll subbase in one direction and repeat in perpendicular direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph (5 km/h).

2. Proof-roll with a pneumatic-tired and loaded, 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons (13.6 tonnes).

3. Correct subbase with soft spots and areas of pumping or rutting exceeding depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm) according to meet 95% compaction in accordance with VDOT specifications for earthwork.



C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and subgrade is ready to receive pavement.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.3 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Obtain Landscape Architect’s approval of formwork alignment prior to placing concrete.

C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. Apply epoxy repair coating to uncoated or damaged surfaces of epox-coated reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.



2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 3. Butt Joints: Use bonding agent at joint locations where fresh concrete is placed against

hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. 4. Keyed Joints: Provide preformed keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys

unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 5. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.

Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals Indicated on Drawings. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 3. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch (25 mm) below

finished surface if joint sealant is indicated. 4. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not

indicated. 5. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together. 6. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/8-inch (3 mm) radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate grooving-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

a. Tolerance: Ensure that grooved joints are within 3 inches (75 mm) either way from centers of dowels.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch (6-mm) radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their Work.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from subbase surface and reinforcement before placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen surfaces.



C. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

E. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

G. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M) by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels, and joint devices.

H. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

I. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

J. Curbs and Gutters: Use design mixture for automatic machine placement. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing.

K. Cold-Weather Placement: Reference Division 03 “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.

L. Hot-Weather Placement: Reference Division 03 “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.



3.8 DETECTABLE WARNINGS

A. Blockouts: Form blockouts in concrete for installation of detectable paving units specified in Division 32 Section "Unit Paving".

1. Tolerance for Opening Size: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm) and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears occurring during installation or curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating, and repair damage during curing period.

3.10 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch (10 mm), minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).



3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- (3-m-) long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Alignment of Tie-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/2 inch per 12 inches (13 mm per 300 mm) of tie bar.

5. Lateral Alignment and Spacing of Dowels: 1 inch (25 mm). 6. Vertical Alignment of Dowels: 1/4 inch (6 mm). 7. Alignment of Dowel-Bar End Relative to Line Perpendicular to Paving Edge: 1/4 inch

per 12 inches (6 mm per 300 mm) of dowel. 8. Joint Spacing: 3 inches (75 mm). 9. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch (6 mm), no minus. 10. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch (3 mm), no minus.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when it is 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Landscape Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain



Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Landscape Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Landscape Architect.

G. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.12 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Landscape Architect.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Landscape Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.



CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS 321373 - 1

SECTION 321373 - CONCRETE PAVING JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cold-applied joint sealants (Joints within cement concrete pavement, Joints adjacent to Brick wall and Stone stairs).

2. Hot-applied joint sealants (Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement).

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving" for constructing joints between concrete and

asphalt pavement. 2. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for constructing joints in concrete pavement.

1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, Samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Use VDOT approved testing methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Submit no fewer than four (4) pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for

corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint-preparation data

that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for compatibility with and adhesion to joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.



B. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch (13-mm) wide joints formed between two 6-inch (150-mm) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Pavement-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for joint sealants.

D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From joint-sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility with and adhesion to joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to VDOT to conduct the testing indicated.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements set forth in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.”


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:



1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Self-leveling, Polyurethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. MasterSeal 733 primer with MasterSeal SL2. b. Sikaflex 429 primer with Sikaflex 2C 2L

2.3 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Hot-poured, Joint Sealant for joints and cracks in both hot-mixed asphalt and Portland concrete surface: shall be low modulus rubberized asphalt conforming with applicable VDOT subsections and AASHTO M 301 with one of the following:

1. Cone penetration, Non-Immersed: shall be between 90-150 2. Flow: shall be 3.00mm maximum 3. Resilience: recovery shall be maximum 60% 4. Bond Test: shall conform at 200% extension

2.4 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS

A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.



B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant.

2.5 PRIMERS

A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install joint-sealant backings of kind indicated to support joint sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.



D. Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place joint sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Quality Control: Joint sealants will be examined by Landscape Architect one year after installation. Joint sealants not adhering will be replaced by Contractor at no cost to Owner.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess joint sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses, by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.

3.6 PAVEMENT-JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints within cement concrete pavement.

1. Joint Location:

a. Expansion and isolation joints in concrete pavement. b. Contraction joints in concrete slabs. c. Isolation joints adjacent Brick walls and Stone stairs.

2. Cold-Applied Joint Sealant for Concrete: Multi-component, self-leveling. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement.

1. Joint Location:

a. Joints between concrete and asphalt pavement. b. Joints between concrete curbs and asphalt pavement.

2. Hot-Applied Joint Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single component. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range.


UNIT PAVING 321400 - 1

SECTION 321400 - UNIT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Brick pavers set in mortar setting beds (Brick Paving Band). 2. Brick pavers set in sand setting beds (Soldier Course at PIP Concrete Paving). 3. Concrete pavers set in mortar setting beds. 4. Detectable warning pavers set in mortar setting beds. 5. Job-built steel edge restraints.


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for concrete base under unit pavers. 2. Division 32 Section “Concrete Paving Joint Sealants”


A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates.

B. Product Data: For the following:

1. Pavers. 2. Mortar materials.

C. Sieve Analyses: For aggregate setting-bed materials, according to ASTM C 136.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

1. Each type of unit paver indicated; minimum two (2) each per type. 2. Joint materials involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification:

1. Full-size units of each type of unit paver indicated. 2. Joint materials.




A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of unit paver, joint material, and setting material from single source with resources to provide materials and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements set forth in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.”


A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing.


A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing.

B. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout:

1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. Provide artificial shade and windbreaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F (38 deg C) and higher.

a. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F (38 deg C), or when wind velocity exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h) and ambient temperature exceeds 90 deg F (32 deg C), set pavers within 1 minute of spreading setting-bed mortar.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BRICK PAVERS

A. Brick Pavers: Light-traffic paving brick for Brick Paving Band and Brick Soldier Course (at PIP Concrete Paving); provide brick without frogs or cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work.

1. Manufacturers: Provide products by Redland Brick Inc.; 15718 Clear Spring Road, P.O. Box 160, Williamsport, MD 21795 – (301)-223-7700. www.redlandbrick.com/brick-dealers-locator.asp

2. Thickness: 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) 3. Face Size: 3-5/8 by 7-5/8 inches (92 by 194 mm) 4. Color: King William Mod Paver - 410

B. Detectable Warning Pavers: Light-traffic paving brick, containing non-slip domes on top surface complying with the American Disabilities Act (ADA).

1. Manufacturer: Provide products by Whitacre Greer; 1400 S. Mahoning Avenue, Alliance, OH 44601 – (330)-823-1610. www.wgpaver.com/dealer-search/

2. Thickness: 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) 3. Face Size: 4 by 8 inches (101 by 203 mm) 4. Color: #30 Clear Red Rustic (ADA/Tactile)

C. Efflorescence: Brick shall be rated "not effloresced" when tested according to ASTM C 67.

2.2 CONCRETE PAVERS

A. Concrete Pavers: Dimensionally compatible Hanover Prest Pavers.

1. Manufacturer: Provide products by Hanover Architectural Products; 5000 Hanover Road, Hanover, PA 17331 – (717)-637-0500. www.hanoverpavers.com:

2. Thickness: 2-1/4 inches (57mm). 3. Face Size and Shape: 23-1/2 by 35-3/8 inch (597 by 897mm) rectangle. 4. Color: Matrix #1025 5. Finish: Tudor

2.3 EDGE RESTRAINTS

A. Job-Built Steel Edge Restraints: Painted galvanized-steel edging 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick by 6 inches (150 mm) high with 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) by 4 inch (100 mm) galvanized hex head anchors with expansion shields.

1. Edge Restraint Color: Black



a. Follow same requirements for painting galvanized steel as directed in Division 05 Section “Decorative Metal Railings”.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Cork Joint Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1752, Type II.

B. Compressible Foam Filler: Preformed strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1.

2.5 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS

A. Graded Aggregate for Subbase: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 57.

B. Graded Aggregate for Base: Sound, crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8.

C. Sand for Leveling Course: Sound, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone complying with gradation requirements in ASTM C 33/C 33M for fine aggregate.

D. Stone Screenings for Leveling Course: Sound stone screenings complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 10.

E. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.

F. Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile fabric, manufactured for subsurface drainage applications, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following, measured per test methods referenced:

1. Survivability: Class 2, AASHTO M 288. 2. Apparent Opening Size: No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, maximum; ASTM D 4751. 3. Permittivity: 0.5 per second, minimum; ASTM D 4491. 4. UV Stability: 50 percent after 500 hours' exposure, ASTM D 4355.

2.6 MORTAR SETTING-BED MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type II.


C. Sand: ASTM C 144.

D. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed, and not containing a retarder.



E. Thinset Mortar: Latex-modified portland cement mortar complying with ANSI A118.4.

1. Manufacturers: Provide product that is approved for application thickness of one (1) inch.

F. Water: Potable.

2.7 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.

1. Colored Mortar Pigments for Grout: Natural and synthetic iron and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar and grout mixes. Use only pigments that have proved, through testing and experience, to be satisfactory for use in Portland cement grout.

B. Grout Colors: As selected by Landscape Architect from manufacturer's full range.

C. Water: Potable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Where pavers are to be installed over waterproofing, examine waterproofing installation, with waterproofing Installer present, for protection from paving operations, including areas where waterproofing system is turned up or flashed against vertical surfaces.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance.

B. Sweep concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.

C. Proof-roll prepared subgrade according to requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Proceed with unit paver installation only after deficient subgrades have been corrected and are ready to receive subbase and base course for unit pavers.




A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, or other defects that might be visible or cause staining in finished work.

B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors and textures.

C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable.

1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.

D. Joint Pattern: As Indicated on Drawings.

E. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.

F. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24 inches (3 mm in 600 mm) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving.

G. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide for sealant-filled joints at locations and of widths indicated. Provide compressible foam filler as backing for sealant-filled joints. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

H. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.

1. Install job-built concrete edge restraints to comply with requirements in Section 2.3 Edge Restraints.

3.4 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS

A. Prepare concrete base materials in accordance with Division 31 Section “Earth Moving”.

B. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches (25 to 38 mm), taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and uniform until pavers are set and compacted.

C. Treat leveling course with herbicide to inhibit growth of grass and weeds.

D. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) and a maximum of 1/8 inch (3 mm), being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch (10 mm) with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers.

1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with spacer bars on sides of each unit.



E. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf (16- to 22-kN) compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Use vibrator with neoprene mat on face of plate or other means as needed to prevent cracking and chipping of pavers. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator.

1. Compact pavers when there is sufficient surface to accommodate operation of vibrator, leaving at least 36 inches (900 mm) of uncompacted pavers adjacent to temporary edges.

2. Before ending each day's work, compact installed concrete pavers except for 36-inch (900 mm) width of uncompacted pavers adjacent to temporary edges (laying faces).

3. As work progresses to perimeter of installation, compact installed pavers that are adjacent to permanent edges unless they are within 36 inches (90 mm) of laying face.

4. Before ending each day's work and when rain interrupts work, cover pavers that have not been compacted and cover leveling course on which pavers have not been placed with nonstaining plastic sheets to protect them from rain.

F. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.

G. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints.

H. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later.

3.5 MORTAR SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS

A. Saturate concrete subbase with clean water several hours before placing setting bed. Remove surface water about one hour before placing setting bed.

B. Apply mortar-bed bond coat over surface of concrete subbase about 15 minutes before placing mortar bed. Limit area of bond coat to avoid its drying out before placing setting bed. Do not exceed 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) thickness for bond coat.

C. Apply mortar bed over bond coat; spread and screed mortar bed to uniform thickness at subgrade elevations required for accurate setting of pavers to finished grades indicated.

D. Mix and place only that amount of mortar bed that can be covered with pavers before initial set. Before placing pavers, cut back, bevel edge, and remove and discard setting-bed material that has reached initial set.

E. Wet brick pavers before laying if the initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

F. Place pavers before initial set of cement occurs. Immediately before placing pavers on mortar bed, apply uniform 1/16-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick bond coat to mortar bed or to back of each paver with a flat trowel.

G. Tamp or beat pavers with a wooden block or rubber mallet to obtain full contact with setting bed and to bring finished surfaces within indicated tolerances. Set each paver in a single



operation before initial set of mortar; do not return to areas already set or disturb pavers for purposes of realigning finished surfaces or adjusting joints.

H. Spaced Joint Widths: Provide 3/8-inch (10-mm) nominal joint width with no variations.

I. Grouted Joints: Grout paver joints complying with ANSI A108.10.

J. Grout joints as soon as possible after initial set of setting bed.

1. Force grout into joints, taking care not to smear grout on adjoining surfaces. 2. Clean pavers as grouting progresses by dry brushing or rubbing with dry burlap to

remove smears before tooling joints. 3. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than

joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. 4. If tooling squeezes grout from joints, remove excess grout and smears by dry brushing or

rubbing with dry burlap and tool joints again to produce a uniform appearance.

K. Cure grout by maintaining in a damp condition for seven days unless otherwise recommended by grout or liquid-latex manufacturer.

3.6 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge voids or holes and completely fill with grout. Point joints at sealant joints to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for sealant application.

C. Cleaning: Remove excess grout from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean.

1. Remove temporary protective coating as recommended by coating manufacturer and as acceptable to paver and grout manufacturers.

2. Do not allow protective coating to enter floor drains. Trap, collect, and remove coating material.



SOIL PREPARATION 329113 - 1

SECTION 329113 - SOIL PREPARATION (PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION)

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes planting soils materials, mixes, and installation.


1. Section 311000 "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AAPFCO: Association of American Plant Food Control Officials.

B. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. This can be amended or unamended soil as indicated.

C. CEC: Cation exchange capacity.

D. Compost: The product resulting from the controlled biological decomposition of organic material that has been sanitized through the generation of heat and stabilized to the point that it is beneficial to plant growth.

E. Duff Layer: A surface layer of soil, typical of forested areas, that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

F. Imported Soil: Soil that is transported to Project site for use.

G. Layered Soil Assembly: A designed series of planting soils, layered on each other, that together produce an environment for plant growth.

H. Manufactured Soil: Soil produced by blending soils, sand, stabilized organic soil amendments, and other materials to produce planting soil.

I. Organic Matter: The total of organic materials in soil exclusive of undecayed plant and animal tissues, their partial decomposition products, and the soil biomass; also called "humus" or "soil organic matter."



J. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified as specified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

K. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

L. Subsoil: Soil beneath the level of subgrade; soil beneath the topsoil layers of a naturally occurring soil profile, typified by less than 1 percent organic matter and few soil organisms.

M. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile. In undisturbed areas, surface soil is typically called "topsoil"; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference Project site to comply with requirements set forth in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.”


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include recommendations for application and use. 2. Material Certificates: For each type of imported soil and soil amendment and fertilizer

before delivery to the site, according to the following:

a. Manufacturer's qualified testing agency's certified analysis of standard products. b. Analysis of fertilizers, by a qualified testing agency, made according to AAPFCO

methods for testing and labeling and according to AAPFCO's SUIP #25.

3. Soil Test Recommendations: Recommendations from qualified soil testing agency indicating the soil amendment for each type of planting (trees, shrubs and perennials, sod).


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent, state-operated, or university-operated laboratory; experienced in soil science, soil testing, and plant nutrition; with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated; and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.

1. Multiple Laboratories: At Contractor's option, work may be divided among qualified testing laboratories specializing in physical testing, chemical testing, and fertility testing.

1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction soil analyses on existing, on-site soil.



B. Preconstruction Soil Analyses: For each unamended soil type, perform testing on soil samples and furnish soil analysis and a written report containing soil-amendment and fertilizer recommendations by a qualified testing agency performing the testing according to "Soil-Sampling Requirements" and "Testing Requirements" articles.

1.8 SOIL-SAMPLING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Extract soil samples according to requirements in this article.

B. Sample Collection and Labeling: Have samples taken and labeled by soil scientist (CPSS) certified by SSSA or [state-certified soil scientist under the direction of the testing agency.

1. Number and Location of Samples: Minimum of three representative soil samples from varied locations for each soil to be used or amended for landscaping purposes.

2. Procedures and Depth of Samples: According to USDA-NRCS's "Field Book for Describing and Sampling Soils."

3. Labeling: Label each sample with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location system, visible soil condition, and sampling depth.

1.9 COMPACTION ANALYSIS

A. Determine site areas previously paved or where heavy compaction could have occurred due to pedestrian or vehicular traffic with respect to proposed locations for planting. For any area of the site where compaction potential has been identified, perform multiple soil penetrometer tests to determine degree and extent of compaction.

B. Conduct a penetration resistance test as follows:

1. Penetration reading must be taken when soil moisture is at field capacity (several days after free drainage). Using a cone penetrometer, apply slow, even pressure so that the penetrometer advances into the soil at a rate of 4 seconds per 6 inches. Record pressure readings at 0-4” depth (surface soil) and at 10-14” depth (subsoil).

2. Pressure in PSI shall be as follows:

a. <110 psi surface soil (all textures). b. <260 psi subsurface soil – loamy sand, sandy loam, sandy clay loam, sandy clay,

loam, silt loam, silty clay loam, and silty clay. c. <225 psi subsurface soil (clay loam).

C. A bulk density test shall be performed if results of the penetrometer are outside the acceptable range. The contractor is to notify Owner if this is needed.

1.10 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Perform tests on soil samples according to requirements in this article.

B. Physical Testing:



1. Soil Texture: Soil-particle, size-distribution analysis by one of the following methods according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods":

a. Sieving Method: Report sand-gradation percentages for very coarse, coarse, medium, fine, and very fine sand; and fragment-gradation (gravel) percentages for fine, medium, and coarse fragments; according to USDA sand and fragment sizes.

b. Hydrometer Method: Report percentages of sand, silt, and clay.

2. Total Porosity: Calculate using particle density and bulk density according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

3. Water Retention: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

4. Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity: According to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1-Physical and Mineralogical Methods"; at 85% compaction according to ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor).

C. Chemical Testing:

1. CEC: Analysis by sodium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."

2. Clay Mineralogy: Analysis and estimated percentage of expandable clay minerals using CEC by ammonium saturation at pH 7 according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 1- Physical and Mineralogical Methods."

3. Metals Hazardous to Human Health: Test for presence and quantities of RCRA metals including aluminum, arsenic, barium, copper, cadmium, chromium, cobalt, lead, lithium, and vanadium. If RCRA metals are present, include recommendations for corrective action.

4. Phytotoxicity: Test for plant-available concentrations of phytotoxic minerals including aluminum, arsenic, barium, cadmium, chlorides, chromium, cobalt, copper, lead, lithium, mercury, nickel, selenium, silver, sodium, strontium, tin, titanium, vanadium, and zinc.

D. Fertility Testing: Soil-fertility analysis according to standard laboratory protocol of SSSA NAPT NCR-13, including the following:

1. Percentage of organic matter. 2. CEC, calcium percent of CEC, and magnesium percent of CEC. 3. Soil reaction (acidity/alkalinity pH value). 4. Buffered acidity or alkalinity. 5. Nitrogen ppm. 6. Phosphorous ppm. 7. Potassium ppm. 8. Manganese ppm. 9. Manganese-availability ppm. 10. Zinc ppm. 11. Zinc availability ppm. 12. Copper ppm. 13. Sodium ppm. 14. Soluble-salts ppm.



15. Presence and quantities of problem materials including salts and metals cited in the Standard protocol. If such problem materials are present, provide additional recommendations for corrective action.

16. Other deleterious materials, including their characteristics and content of each.

E. Organic-Matter Content: Analysis using loss-by-ignition method according to SSSA's "Methods of Soil Analysis - Part 3- Chemical Methods."

F. Recommendations: Based on the test results, state recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be incorporated to produce satisfactory planting soil suitable for healthy, viable plants indicated. Include, at a minimum, recommendations for nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium fertilization, and for micronutrients.

1. Fertilizers and Soil Amendment Rates: State recommendations in weight per 1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m) for 6-inch (150-mm) depth of soil.

2. Soil Reaction: State the recommended liming rates for raising pH or sulfur for lowering pH according to the buffered acidity or buffered alkalinity in weight per 1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m) for 6-inch (150-mm) depth of soil.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and compliance with state and Federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants.

2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Do not move or handle materials when they are wet or frozen. 4. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate

certificates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Regional Materials: Imported soil, manufactured planting soil and soil amendments and fertilizers shall be manufactured within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles (800 km) of Project site.



2.2 TOPSOIL

A. Topsoil: ASTM D 5268, pH range of 5.5 to 7, a minimum of 2 percent organic material con-tent; free of stones 1 inch or larger in any dimension and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of stockpiled sur-face soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

a. Supplement with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources when quanti-ties are insufficient. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricul-tural land, bogs or marshes.

2. Topsoil Source: Import topsoil or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain top-soil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

3. Topsoil Source: Amend existing in-place surface soil to produce topsoil. Verify suitability of surface soil to produce topsoil. Clean surface soil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth.

a. Surface soil may be supplemented with imported or manufactured topsoil from off-site sources. Obtain topsoil displaced from naturally well-drained construction or mining sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain from agricultural land, bogs or marshes.

2.3 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Lime: ASTM C 602, agricultural liming material containing a minimum of 80 percent calcium carbonate equivalent and as follows:

1. Class: T, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum of 75 percent passing through a No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

2. Class: O, with a minimum of 95 percent passing through a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and a minimum of 55 percent passing through a No. 60 (0.25-mm) sieve.

3. Form: Provide lime in form of ground dolomitic limestone or calcitic limestone

B. Sulfur: Granular, biodegradable, and containing a minimum of 90 percent elemental sulfur, with a minimum of 99 percent passing through a No. 6 (3.35-mm) sieve and a maximum of 10 percent passing through a No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve.

C. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur.

D. Perlite: Horticultural perlite, soil amendment grade.

E. Agricultural Gypsum: Minimum 90 percent calcium sulfate, finely ground with 90 percent passing through a No. 50 (0.30-mm) sieve.



F. Sand: Clean, washed, natural or manufactured, free of toxic materials, and according to ASTM C 33.

2.4 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter produced by composting feedstock, and bearing USCC's "Seal of Testing Assurance," and as follows:

1. Reaction: pH of 5.5 to 8 2. Soluble-Salt Concentration: Less than 5 dS/m. 3. Moisture Content: 30-60 percent by weight. 4. Particle Size: Minimum of 98 percent passing through a 3/4” sieve or smaller 5. Solvita Maturity test: 6 or higher. 6. Chemical Contaminants: mg/kg (ppm) to meet or exceed U.S. EPA Class A, 40 CFR

503.13, Tables 1 and 3 levels. 7. Biological contaminants select pathogens fecal coliform, bacteria, or salmonella, meet or

exceed U.S. EPA Class A, 40 CFR 503.32(a) levels.

B. Wood Derivatives: Shredded and composted, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of uniform texture and free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.

1. Partially Decomposed Wood Derivatives: In lieu of shredded and composted wood derivatives, mix shredded and partially decomposed wood derivatives with ammonium nitrate at a minimum rate of 0.15 lb/cu. ft. (2.4 kg/cu. m) of loose sawdust or ground bark, or with ammonium sulfate at a minimum rate of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. (4 kg/cu. m) of loose sawdust or ground bark.

C. Manure: Well-rotted, unleached, stable or poultry, swine, cattle, or equine manure containing not more than 25 percent by volume of straw, sawdust, or other bedding materials; free of toxic substances, stones, sticks, soil, weed seed, debris, and material harmful to plant growth.

2.5 FERTILIZERS

A. Superphosphate: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20percent available phosphoric acid.

B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:

1. Composition: 1 lb/1000 sq. ft. (0.5 kg/100 sq. m) of actual nitrogen, 4 percent phosphorous, and 2 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified testing agency.

C. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:



1. Composition: 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorous, and 10 percent potassium, by weight.

2. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in soil reports from a qualified testing agency.

D. Bonemeal: Commercial, phosphate mixture, soluble; a minimum of 20 percent available phosphoric acid.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in planting soil.

B. Proceed with placement only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION OF UNAMENDED, ON-SITE SOIL BEFORE AMENDING

A. Unacceptable Materials: Clean soil of concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, building debris, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, acid, and other extraneous materials that are harmful to plant growth.

B. Unsuitable Materials: Clean soil of stones, roots, plants, sod, clay lumps, and pockets of coarse sand to the maximum extent possible.

3.3 PLACING AND MIXING PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE

A. General: Apply and mix unamended soil with amendments on-site to produce required planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Remove stones larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply, add soil amendments, and mix approximately half the thickness of unamended soil over prepared, loosened subgrade according to "Mixing" Paragraph below. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.

C. Mixing: Spread unamended soil to total depth of 4 inches (100 mm), but not less than required to meet finish grades after mixing with amendments and natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

1. Amendments: Apply soil amendments, except compost, and fertilizer, if required, evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend them with unamended soil to produce planting soil.



a. Mix lime and sulfur with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. b. Mix fertilizer with planting soil no more than seven days before planting.

2. Lifts: Apply and mix unamended soil and amendments in lifts not exceeding 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

D. Compaction: Compact each blended lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698 and tested in-place.

E. Finish Grading: Grade planting soil to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

3.4 PLACING MANUFACTURED PLANTING SOIL OVER EXPOSED SUBGRADE

A. General: Apply manufactured soil on-site in its final, blended condition. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Subgrade Preparation: Till subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Remove stones larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Apply approximately half the thickness of planting soil over prepared, loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.

C. Application: Spread planting soil to total depth of 4 inches (100 mm), but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

1. Lifts: Apply planting soil in lifts not exceeding 8 inches (200 mm in loose depth for material compacted by compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

D. Compaction: Compact each lift of planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698.


3.5 BLENDING PLANTING SOIL IN PLACE

A. General: Mix amendments with in-place, unamended soil to produce required planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Preparation: Till unamended, existing soil in planting areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Remove stones larger than 3 inches (75 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



C. Mixing: Apply soil amendments, except compost, and fertilizer, if required, evenly on surface, and thoroughly blend them into full depth of unamended, in-place soil to produce planting soil.

1. Mix lime and sulfur with dry soil before mixing fertilizer. 2. Mix fertilizer with planting soil no more than seven days before planting.

D. Compaction: Compact blended planting soil to 75 to 82 percent of maximum Standard Proctor density according to ASTM D 698.


3.6 APPLYING COMPOST TO SURFACE OF PLANTING SOIL

A. Application: Apply compost component of planting-soil mix 4 inches (100 mm) of compost to surface of in-place planting soil. Do not apply materials or till if existing soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

B. Finish Grading: Grade surface to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform the following tests and inspections:

1. Compaction: Test planting-soil compaction after placing each lift and at completion using a densitometer or soil-compaction meter calibrated to a reference test value based on laboratory testing according to ASTM D 698. Space tests at no less than one for each 1000 sq. ft. (100 sq. m) 2000 sq. ft. (200 sq. m)of in-place soil or part thereof.

2. Performance Testing: For each amended planting-soil type, demonstrating compliance with specified performance requirements. Perform testing according to “Soil-Sampling Requirement” and “Testing Requirements” articles.

C. Soil will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

E. Label each sample and test report with the date, location keyed to a site plan or other location system, visible conditions when and where sample was taken, and sampling depth.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protection Zone: Identify protection zones according to Section 015639 "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."



B. Protect areas of in-place soil from additional compaction, disturbance, and contamination. Prohibit the following practices within these areas except as required to perform planting operations:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Vehicle traffic. 4. Foot traffic. 5. Erection of sheds or structures. 6. Impoundment of water. 7. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated.

C. If planting soil or subgrade is overcompacted, disturbed, or contaminated by foreign or deleterious materials or liquids, remove the planting soil and contamination; restore the subgrade as directed by Architect and replace contaminated planting soil with new planting soil.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Protect areas adjacent to planting-soil preparation and placement areas from contamination. Keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable materials, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property unless otherwise indicated.

1. Dispose of excess subsoil and unsuitable materials on-site where directed by Owner.



TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1

SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Turf renovation.


1. Section 329113 “Soil Preparation” for soil amendments, fertilizers, and top soil.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

B. Planting Soil: Existing, on-site soil; imported soil; or manufactured soil that has been modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. See Section 329113 "Soil Preparation"

C. Subgrade: The surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements set forth in Division 1 Section “Project Management and Coordination.”


A. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.

B. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture, stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.



1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier.

C. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers, from manufacturer.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment. 1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time

supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated and that specializes in the types of tests to be performed.

C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content, cation exchange capacity, sodium absorption rate, deleterious material, pH, and mineral and plant nutrient content of topsoil.

1. Report suitability of topsoil for lawn growth. State recommended quantities of nitrogen, phosphorous, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to produce a satisfactory topsoil.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of compliance with state and Federal laws, as applicable.

B. Sod: Harvest, deliver, store, and handle sod according to requirements in "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" and "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Transplanting and Installation" sections in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Deliver sod within 24 hours of harvesting and in time for planting promptly. Protect sod from breakage and drying.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Planting Restrictions: Plant during one of the following periods.

1. Spring Planting: March 15 to June 15. 2. Fall Planting: August 15 to September 15.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEED

A. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with AOSA's "Journal of Seed Technology - Rules for Testing Seeds" for purity and germination tolerances.

B. Seed Species:

1. Quality: State-certified seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure. 2. Quality: Seed of grass species as listed below for solar exposure, with not less than 95

percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5percent weed seed:

3. Full Sun: Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis), a minimum of three cultivars. 4. Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. 50 percent Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis). b. 30 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). c. 10 percent perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne). d. 10 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).

2.2 TURFGRASS SOD

A. Turfgrass Sod: Number 1 Quality/Premium, including limitations on thatch, weeds, diseases, nematodes, and insects, complying with "Specifications for Turfgrass Sod Materials" in TPI's "Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding." Furnish viable sod of uniform density, color, and texture that is strongly rooted and capable of vigorous growth and development when planted.

B. Turfgrass Species: Sod of grass species as follows, with not less than 95 percent germination, not less than 85 percent pure seed, and not more than 0.5 percent weed seed:

1. Full Sun: Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis), a minimum of three cultivars. 2. Sun and Partial Shade: Proportioned by weight as follows:

a. 50 percent Kentucky bluegrass (Poa pratensis). b. 30 percent chewings red fescue (Festuca rubra variety). c. 10 percent perennial ryegrass (Lolium perenne). d. 10 percent redtop (Agrostis alba).

2.3 MULCHES

A. Straw Mulch: Provide air-dry, clean, mildew- and seed-free, salt hay or threshed straw of wheat, rye, oats, or barley.

B. Compost Mulch: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 1-inch (25-mm) sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows:



1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or

source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste.

C. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting installation and performance of the Work.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Suspend planting operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

3. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable or which is dusty.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, or as directed by Landscape Architect.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures; utilities; sidewalks; pavements; and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations.

3.3 TURF AREA PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare planting area for soil placement and mix planting soil according to Section 329113 "Soil Preparation."

3.4 SEEDING

A. Sow seed with spreader or seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).

1. Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in two directions at right angles to each other.

2. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged. 3. Do not seed against existing trees. Limit extent of seed to outside edge of planting saucer.

B. Sow seed at a total rate of 5 to 8 lb/1000 sq. ft. (2.3 to 3.6 kg/92.9 sq. m).



C. Rake seed lightly into top 1/8 inch (3 mm) of soil, roll lightly, and water with fine spray.

D. Protect seeded areas with slopes exceeding 1:4 with erosion-control blankets installed and stapled according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Protect seeded areas with slopes not exceeding 1:6 by spreading straw mulch. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons/acre (42 kg/92.9 sq. m) to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in loose thickness over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment.

1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into soil with suitable mechanical equipment. 2. Bond straw mulch by spraying with asphalt emulsion at a rate of 10 to 13 gal./1000 sq. ft.

(38 to 49 L/92.9 sq. m). Take precautions to prevent damage or staining of structures or other plantings adjacent to mulched areas. Immediately clean damaged or stained areas.

F. Protect seeded areas from hot, dry weather or drying winds by applying compost mulch within 24 hours after completing seeding operations. Soak areas, scatter mulch uniformly to a thickness of 3/16 inch (4.8 mm), and roll surface smooth.

3.5 SODDING

A. Lay sod within 24 hours of harvesting. Do not lay sod if dormant or if ground is frozen or muddy.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly fitted joints. Butt ends and sides of sod; do not stretch or overlap. Stagger sod strips or pads to offset joints in adjacent courses. Avoid damage to soil or sod during installation. Tamp and roll lightly to ensure contact with soil, eliminate air pockets, and form a smooth surface. Work sifted soil or fine sand into minor cracks between pieces of sod; remove excess to avoid smothering sod and adjacent grass.

1. Lay sod across slopes exceeding 1:3. 2. Anchor sod on slopes exceeding 1:6 with steel staples spaced as recommended by sod

manufacturer but not less than two anchors per sod strip to prevent slippage.

C. Saturate sod with fine water spray within two hours of planting. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) below sod.

3.6 TURF RENOVATION

A. Renovate turf damaged by Contractor's operations, such as storage of materials or equipment and movement of vehicles.

1. Reestablish turf where settlement or washouts occur or where minor regrading is required.

B. Remove sod and vegetation from diseased or unsatisfactory turf areas; do not bury in soil.



C. Remove topsoil containing foreign materials, such as oil drippings, fuel spills, stones, gravel, and other construction materials resulting from Contractor's operations, and replace with new planting soil.

D. Mow, dethatch, core aerate, and rake existing turf.

E. Remove weeds before seeding. Where weeds are extensive, apply selective herbicides as required. Do not use pre-emergence herbicides.

F. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

G. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches (150 mm).

H. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizer required for establishing new turf and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches (100 mm) of existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades.

I. Apply sod as required for new turf.

J. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established.

3.7 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Seeded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, uniform, close stand of grass has been established, free of weeds and surface irregularities, with coverage exceeding 90 percent over any 10 sq. ft. (0.92 sq. m) and bare spots not exceeding 5 by 5 inches (125 by 125 mm).

2. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements, and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

3.8 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.

D. Remove erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.

- 1 -

NVRPA DOCUMENT GC 101

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AND

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

FOR CONSTRUCTION

THIS DOCUMENT HAS IMPORTANT LEGAL CONSEQUENCES;

CONSULTATION WITH AN ATTORNEY IS ENCOURAGED

2013 EDITION

- 2 -

ARTICLE NUMBER TITLE 1. Definitions 2. Contract Documents 3. Laws and Regulations 4. Conditions at Site or Structure 5. Explanation to Bidders 6. Preparation and Submission of Bids 7. Bid Guarantee 8. Withdrawal or Modification of Bids 9. Receipt and Opening of Bids 10. Errors in Bids 11. Rejection of Bids 12. Standard Forms 13. Award of Contract 14. Contract Security 15. Progress Schedules 16. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples 17. Materials, Services and Facilities 18. Inspection and Testing 19. Substitutions 20. Patents 21. Surveys, Permits, Regulations 22. Protection of Work, Property and Persons 23. Supervision by Contractor 24. Changes in the Work 25. Changes in the Contract Sum or Other Relief 26. Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages 27. Correction of Work 28. Suspension of Work, Authority’s Right to

Stop and Carry Out the Work 29. Termination 30. Uses of the Premises 31. Payment to the Contractor 32. Substantial Completion of the Work 33. Final Completion and Final Payment 34. Insurance 35. Assignments 36. Indemnification 37. Contractor Liability 38. Separate Contracts 39. Subcontracting 40. Engineer 41. Warranty 42. Contractual Disputes

- 3 -

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT WITH

THE NORTHERN VIRGINIA REGIONAL PARK AUTHORITY Article 1: DEFINITIONS (a) Addenda – Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the Award of the Contract which modify

or interpret the Contract Documents, Drawings, and Specifications by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections

(b) Engineer – The design professional, including an architect, that has contracted with the Authority to

design the Project and administer the Contract on behalf of the Authority. If no Project Engineer is designated all duties and responsibilities which the Engineer would otherwise have shall be the duties and responsibilities of the Authority.

(c) Authority – The Northern Virginia Regional Park Authority. (d) Change Order – A written order to the Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in

the Work within the general scope of the Contract Documents or authorizing an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time. A Change Order, which adjusts the Contract Price or Contract Time, must be signed by the Authority, Contractor and Engineer. A Change Order includes a Field Order, as hereafter defined.

(e) Construction Change Directive - A written order to the Contractor signed by the Authority directing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work within the general scope of the Contract Documents prior to an agreement between the Authority and the Contractor as to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time. Upon receipt of a Construction Changes Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work described therein.

(f) Contract Sum – The total monies payable to the Contractor under the terms and Conditions of the

Contract Documents. (g) Contract Time – The specific date or the number of days stated in the Contract Documents or the

Notice to Proceed for Substantial Completion of the Work.

(h) Contractor – Any person of entity who has a contract directly with the Authority for the performance of the Work or a part thereof.

(i) Day – A calendar day of 24 hours lasting from midnight one day to midnight the next day. (j) Drawings – The graphic and pictorial part of the Contract Documents that show the characteristics

and scope of the Work to be performed and that has been prepared by or for the Authority. The term is used interchangeably with the word “Plans” and includes Standard Details.

(k) Field Order – A written order issued by the Engineer or the Authority to the Contractor during

construction effecting a change in the Work, but not involving an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time.

(l) Inspector – The authorized representative of the Authority assigned to make detailed inspection of

any or all portions of the Work. The Inspector is authorized to stop the Work in accordance with Article 29.

(m) Notice of Award – The written notice of the acceptance of the Bid from the Authority to the

successful Bidder. (n) Special Conditions – General requirements that are unique to a particular Contract. (o) Standard Details – Details showing standard products, methods, and materials contained within the

Plans or other agency standards such as the current versions of the Fairfax County Public Facilities Manual or the Virginia Department of Highways and Transportation Road and Bridge standards and specifications.

- 4 -

(p) Specifications – Special Conditions, Standard Specifications and Standard Details. (q) Subcontractor – An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract with the Contractor or

with any other subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site.

Substantial Completion – That date as certified by the Engineer when the construction of the Project or a specified part thereof is sufficiently completed in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Project or specified part can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended and when the Contractor has received all final inspections and occupancy permits from the appropriate jurisdictions.

(r) Supplementary General Conditions – Modifications to General Conditions required for the Project. (s) Supplier – Any person or organization who supplies materials or equipment for the Work (including

that fabricated to a special design) but who does not perform labor at the site. (t) Work – Any and all labor, materials, equipment, and all obligations, duties, and responsibilities

expressly stated or reasonably implied for the successful completion of the construction required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor’s Work includes payment of all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required by law.

(u) Written Notice – Any notice to any party of the Contract relative to any part of the Contract in

writing and considered delivered and the service thereof completed when posted by mail to the party at its last given address, or delivered in person to the party or its authorized representative at the Project.

Article 2: CONTRACT DOCUMENTS (a) The agreement entered into by the parties shall consist of the Form of Construction Contract, the

Form of Proposal submitted by the Contractor, the Supplemental General Conditions, these General Conditions, the specifications and drawings, including all modifications thereof, all of which shall be referred to collectively as the “Contract Documents.” The Form of Construction Contract shall be signed by the Authority and Contractor in as many original counterparts as may be mutually agreed upon. The Contract may be amended only by a written amendment to the Contract or a Change Order signed by both parties.

(b) The Contract Documents are complimentary and what is required by one shall be binding on the

Contractor as if required by all. In the event of any inconsistency between the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide the greater quality or quantity of Work with no increase in the Contract Sum. The intent of the Contract Documents is that the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, utilities, transportation and incidental work necessary for the proper execution of the Work in accordance with, or reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents. In the event of conflicts among the Contract Documents, the Authority may designate the written or drawn provision or feature which shall be used and no additions to or deductions from the Contract Sum, or modification to the Contract Time, shall result from the choice. In case of conflicts, the Contract Documents shall take precedence in the following order: the Construction Contract; The Supplemental General Conditions; the General Conditions; the Special Conditions; the specifications; and the drawings.

(c) This Contract is an entire and integrated agreement and is not severable. (d) Contractor shall identify in writing to the Authority and the Engineer, as soon as possible, any

discrepancies, errors, omissions and/or inconsistencies or ambiguities, discovered by the Contractor in the Contract Documents. Work done by the Contractor after its discovery of such discrepancies, errors, omissions and/or inconsistencies or ambiguities and prior to response from the Engineer shall be done at the Contractor’s sole risk and cost.

- 5 -

Article 3: LAWS AND REGULATIONS (a) In the performance of the Work, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of all local, state

and federal laws, codes, statutes, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any public authority relating to the performance of the Work (the “Legal Requirements”).

(b) All Contractors and Subcontractors for the Project must be properly licensed under the laws of the

Commonwealth of Virginia and in good standing before submitting any bid and before commencing any Work. Upon the request of the Authority, any Contractor or Subcontractor for the Project shall promptly provide proof of its licensure.

(c) The Contract and all other contracts and subcontracts are subject to the provisions of Article 3 and

5, Chapter 4, Title 40.1, Code of Virginia, 1950, as amended, relating to labor unions and the “right to work,” and all Contractors or Subcontractors, whether residents or nonresidents of the Commonwealth, who perform any work related to the project shall comply with all of the provisions of these code sections.

(d) The Contractor shall furnish the Authority copies of affidavits upon request giving the original dates,

renewal dates and expiration dates of all labor contracts related to any phase of the work to be performed on the project site under this Contract.

(e) Contractor shall comply with all local, state and federal safety codes, statutes, rules, practices and

regulations.

(f) EQUAL OPPORTUNITY EMPLOYMENT (1) During the performance of the Agreement, the Contractor agrees as follows: (i) The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for

employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, disability or other basis prohibited by federal or state law relating to discrimination in employment, except where there is a bona-fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of the Contractor. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.

(ii) The Contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on

behalf of the Contractor, shall state that Contractor is an equal opportunity employer.

(iii) Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in accordance with federal law, rule

or regulation shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting the notice, advertisement, and solicitation requirements of this paragraph.

(2) The Contractor shall cause to be included the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs a.(i),

a.(ii) and a.(iii) (substituting the subcontractor or vendor for Contractor as the obligated party) in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.

(g) DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE (1) During the performance of the Agreement, the Contractor agrees to (i) provide a drug-free

workplace for the Contractor’s employees, (ii) post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a controlled substance or marijuana is prohibited in the Contractor’s workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition, (iii) state in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor that the Contractor maintains a drug-free workplace, and (iv) cause to be included the provisions of the foregoing clause (substituting the subcontractor or vendor for the Contractor as the

- 6 -

obligated party) in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.

(2) For the purposes of this section, “drug-free workplace” means a site for the performance of

work done in connection with the Agreement by Contractor where its employees are prohibited from engaging in the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation, possession or use of any controlled substance or marijuana during the performance of the Agreement.

(h) NO EMPLOYMENT OF UNAUTHORIZED ALIENS Contractor represents and warrants that Contractor does not, and shall not during the performance of this Agreement, knowingly employ any unauthorized alien as defined in the Federal Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986. (i) STATEMENT OF NONDISCRIMINATION AGAINST FAITH-BASED ORGANIZATIONS The Authority does not discriminate against faith-based organizations. (See Va. Code § 2.2-4343.1). (j) PROMPT PAYMENT REQUIREMENTS Within seven days after Contractor receives amounts paid for work subject to the Agreement performed by any “subcontractor,” as defined in Code of Virginia § 2.2-4347, Contractor shall take one of the two following actions: (1) Pay the subcontractor for the proportionate share of the total payment received from Owner

attributable to the work performed by the subcontractor; or (2) Notify Owner and the subcontractor in writing of Contractor’s intent to withhold all or part

of the subcontractor’s payment and the reason for nonpayment. (k) Contractor shall provide its Federal employer identification number with each application to Owner for payment. (l) Contractor shall pay interest to any “subcontractor” on all amounts owed by Contractor that remain unpaid after seven days following receipt by Contractor of payment from Owner for work performed by such subcontractor relating to the Agreement except as to amounts withheld as retainage. (m) Contractor shall include in its subcontracts a provision requiring each subcontractor to include or otherwise be subject to the same payment and interest requirements with respect to each lower-tier subcontractor. (n) No obligation imposed by this section shall be construed to create any obligation of Owner under Code of Virginia § 2.2-4354, no modification to the Agreement may be made for the purpose of providing reimbursement for the interest charge, and Contractor shall not invoice Owner for any such charge. (o) LIMITATION ON OWNER’S LIABILITY FOR INTEREST Owner shall not be liable to pay any interest to Contractor under any circumstance except in the case of amounts that Owner does not dispute to be due and payable to Contractor; interest shall accrue beginning on the 60th day after payment is due at a rate of 3% per annum.

- 7 -

(p) AUTHORIZATION TO CONDUCT BUSINESS IN VIRGINIA

The provisions of Va. Code § 2.2-4311.2 are incorporated by reference. If Contractor is a business entity described in Va. Code § 2.2-4311.2.A, Contractor must be authorized to transact business in Virginia if required by law to be so authorized and shall not allow its existence or certificate authority or registration to transact business to lapse or be revoked or cancelled during the term of the contract.

Article 4: CONDITIONS AT SITE OR STRUCTURE (a) All Bidders and Contractors shall visit the site and shall be responsible for having ascertained

pertinent local conditions such as location, accessibility and general character of the site or building, and the character and extent of existing work within or adjacent to the site and to compare those conditions with the Contract Documents and the Legal Requirements. Claims, as a result of the Bidder’s and/or Contractor’s failure to comply with the foregoing, will not be considered by the Authority and are waived by the Contractor.

If in the performance of the Contract the Contractor discovers subsurface or latent conditions at the site that are materially different from those typical for the locality or indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall report the conditions to the Engineer and the Authority in writing before the conditions are disturbed. Upon such notice, or upon its own observation of such conditions, the Engineer shall promptly make such recommendations as it finds necessary to address the different conditions. Any change in the cost of the work or time needed for completion must be processed pursuant to the requirements of the Contract Documents.

Article 5: EXPLANATION TO BIDDERS No oral explanation in regard to the meaning of drawings and specifications will be made and no oral instructions will be given before the award of the contract. Bidders shall identify in writing to the Authority and the Engineer any believed discrepancies, omissions, ambiguities or errors in the Contract Documents. Bidders must submit such a writing at least six (6) days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids to allow a sufficient time for a reply to reach them before the submission of their bids, but if there are two (2) weeks or less between the first bid advertisement and the time set for receipt of bids, then bidders may act up to three (3) days prior to the time set for receipt of bids. Any interpretation made will be in the form of an addendum to the specifications, which will be forwarded to all bidders, and its receipt by the bidder shall be acknowledged on the Bid Form. Article 6: PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BIDS (a) Bids shall be submitted in duplicate on the forms furnished, or true copies thereof, and shall be

signed in ink. Erasures or other changes in a bid shall be explained or noted over the signature of the bidder. Bids containing any conditions, omissions, unexplained erasures, alterations or items not called for in the proposal, or irregularities of any kind, may be rejected by the Authority as being incomplete.

(b) Each bid must give the full business address and contact information for the bidder and must be

signed by a person with authority to bind the bidder. Bids by partnerships must furnish the full name of all partners and must be signed in the partnership name by one of the members of the partnership or an authorized representative, followed by the signature and designation of the person signing. Bids by corporations must be signed with the legal name of the corporation followed by the name of the state in which they are incorporated and by the signature and designation of the president, secretary or other person authorized to bind it in the matter. The name of each person signing shall also be typed or printed below the signature. A bid by a person who affixes to its signature the word “President,” “Secretary,” “Agent,” or other designation without disclosing its principal, may be held to be the bid of the individual signing. When requested by the Authority, satisfactory evidence of the authority of the officer signing on behalf of the corporation shall be furnished.

(c) Bids with the bid guarantee shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, which shall be marked and

addressed as indicated by the advertisement or invitation to bid. Prior to submitting a bid, the

- 8 -

bidder must be in compliance with and have the licenses required under Virginia Code Section 54.1-1100, et seq. The bidder shall place on the outside of the envelope containing the bid and shall place in the bid over its signature whichever of the following notations is appropriate, inserting its Contractor license number.

If the bidder shall fail to provide this information on its bid or on the envelope containing the bid and shall fail to promptly provide the Contractor license number to the Authority in writing when requested to do so before the opening of bids, its bid will not be considered.

(d) The owner reserves the right to disqualify any Contractor and refuse to accept the bid of any bidder which has been convicted, or entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere in any federal or state court to any charge involving any unlawful, corrupt or collusive practice involving a public contract either federal, state, or local or which has been determined in any judicial proceeding to have violated any antitrust, bid-rigging or collusive practice statute in connection with any public contract, or against whom such formal criminal prosecution or other judicial proceeding has been initiated.

Article 7: BID GUARANTEE (a) Any bid exceeding Five Hundred Thousand Dollars ($500,000) shall be accompanied by a bid

guarantee of not less than five percent (5%) of the amount of the bid, which may be certified check or cashier’s check, or a Bid Bond made payable to the Authority. Bid Bonds shall be submitted on AIA Document A310. Such Bid Bond or check shall be submitted with the understanding that it shall guarantee that the bidder will not withdraw its bid during the period up to and including ninety (90) days following the opening of bids; that if its bid is accepted, it will enter into a formal contract with the Authority in accordance with the Form of Construction Contract included as a part of the Contract Documents, and that the referenced Performance Bond and Labor and material Payment Bond will be given; and that in the event of the withdrawal of the bid within the period, or failure to enter into the contract and give the bonds within ten (10) days after it has received notice of acceptance of its bid, the bidder shall be liable to the Authority for the difference between the amount of the bidder’s bid and the amount of the bid for the next higher bidder to perform the Work but such amount shall not exceed the amount of the bid guarantee.

(b) The Bid Bonds and checks will be returned to all except the three lowest bidders after the formal

opening of the bids. The remaining Bid Bonds and checks will be returned to the lowest bidders after the Authority and the accepted bidder have executed the Contract and the Performance Bond and the Payment Bond have been approved by the Authority.

(c) If the required Contract and bonds have not been executed within ninety (90) days after the date of

the opening of the bids, then the bond or check of any bidder will be returned upon its request, provided it has not been notified of the acceptance of the bid prior to the date of such request.

Article 8: WITHDRAWAL OR MODIFICATION OF BIDS A bidder may withdraw or modify its bid only by written notice delivered to the Authority prior to the time fixed for receipt of bids. Article 9: RECEIPT AND OPENING BIDS (a) It is the responsibility of the bidder to assure that its bid is delivered to the place designated for

receipt of bids and prior to the time set for receipt of bids. The Authority will not consider bids received after the time set for receipt of bids.

(b) Bids will be opened at the time and place stated in the advertisement and the lowest bidder will be

announced. The officer or agent of the Authority, whose duty it is to open the bids, will decide when the specified time has arrived. No responsibility will be attached to any officer or agent for the premature opening of a bid not properly addressed and identified.

- 9 -

Article 10: ERRORS IN BIDS A bidder may withdraw its bid from consideration if the price bid was substantially lower than the other bids due solely to a mistake in the bid, provided the bid was submitted in good faith, and the mistake was a clerical mistake as opposed to a judgment mistake, and was actually due to an unintentional arithmetic error or an unintentional omission of quantity of work, labor or material made directly in the complication of a bid, which unintentional arithmetic error or unintentional omission can be clearly shown by objective evidence drawn from inspection of original work papers, documents and materials used in the preparation of the bid sought to be withdrawn. Under this provision a bidder requesting to withdraw its bid shall follow the procedures set forth in Section 2.2-4330 of the Code of Virginia. The bidder must give notice in writing of its claim of right to withdraw its bid within the time frame required by Section 2.2-4330 of the Code of Virginia and shall submit its original work papers to the Authority in compliance with the requirements of Section 2.2-4330 of the Code of Virginia. Failure to strictly comply with the requirements of Section 2.2-4330 of the Code of Virginia shall constitute a waiver of the right to withdraw the bid. No bid may be withdrawn when the result would be the awarding of the Contract on another bid of the same bidder. No bidder who is permitted to withdraw a bid shall for compensation supply any material or labor to or perform any subcontract or other work agreement for the person or firm to whom the contract is awarded or otherwise benefit, directly or indirectly, from the performance of the project for which the withdrawn bid was submitted, without the approval of the Authority. The person or firm to whom the Contract was awarded and the withdrawing bidder are jointly liable to the Authority in an amount equal to any compensation paid to or for the benefit of the withdrawing bidder without such approval. If a bid is withdrawn under authority of this section, the next higher bidder shall be deemed to be the low bidder on the project. Article 11: REJECTION OF BIDS The Authority reserves the right to reject any and all bids when such rejection is in the interest of the Authority, and will reject the bid of a bidder who is not a responsible bidder. (See § 2.2-4319, Code of Virginia, 1950, as amended.) Article 12: STANDARD FORMS The copies of the Form of Construction Contract, and AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and the Labor and Material Payment Bond are incorporated into the General Conditions by reference and are made a part hereof to the same extent as though fully set forth herein. Article 13: AWARD OF CONTRACT (a) The Contract will be awarded as soon as possible to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder,

provided its bid is reasonable and it is in the interest of the Authority to accept it. The Authority reserves the right to waive any informality in bids received when such waiver is in the interest of the Authority; also to accept any item in the bid unless otherwise specified by the Authority. Each bidder shall be prepared, if so requested by the Authority, to present evidence of its experience, qualifications and financial ability to carry out the terms of the Contract.

(b) If the bid forms contain alternate prices, the Authority may in its sole discretion, unless otherwise

specified in the invitation for bid, select whatever alternates it chooses to accept subsequent to the bid opening but prior to the determination of the low bidder. The low bidder shall be determined by comparing each bidder’s bid total based on the sum of the base bid and the alternates selected by the Authority.

(c) Pursuant to the Virginia Public Procurement Act, in the event the lowest responsible bid exceeds

available funds for the project, the Authority may enter into negotiations with the lowest responsible bidder in an effort to arrive at a contract amount within the limits of available funds. In such event, the Authority will inform the bidder of the amount of funds available, and will negotiate in good faith toward achieving the funding limit, preferably without any change in the scope or other change in the Contract Documents. However, negotiations may include change in scope, quantity of materials, or other changes, so long as any such changes are within the general scope of the original design. If

- 10 -

the Authority and bidder reach agreement, the Authority may award a contract in accordance with procedures or actions approved by the Authority Board. The Authority may terminate negotiations at any time prior to the award of a contract, and proceed as otherwise permitted by the Virginia Public Procurement Act.

Article 14: CONTRACT SECURITY For all contracts of Five Hundred Thousand Dollars ($500,000.00) or more, the Contractor shall deliver to the Authority or its designated representative, an AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond, each fully executed by one or more surety companies legally authorized to do business in Virginia and each in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the original Contract Sum. The bonds shall be conditioned as set forth in § 2.2-4337 of the Code of Virginia, as amended. Sureties shall be selected by the Contractor subject to approval by the Authority. No contract shall be deemed to be in effect until the bonds have been approved by the Authority. For the purposes of all Labor and Material Payment Bonds entered into pursuant to this Article, the term “subcontractors” as used in § 2.2-4337 A.2 of the Code of Virginia is interpreted to mean any contractors who participated in the prosecution of the Work undertaken by the Contractor, whether such subcontractor had a direct contract with the Contractor or whether there were one or more other intervening subcontractors. Article 15: PROGRESS SCHEDULES (a) The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days of receipt of notice of award, prepare and submit to the

Authority and Engineer a schedule for the completion of the Work within the timeframe set forth in the Contract Documents. This progress schedule shall be related to the entire Project; shall include all the Work; and shall meet the time for completion requirements of the Contract. It shall include an allowance for anticipated delay caused by ordinary adverse weather conditions and shall provide for the expeditious and practical execution of the Work within the time requirements of the Contract Documents. The schedule shall set forth as much detail as deemed necessary by the Authority.

(b) The Authority’s acceptance of the schedule is not a representation or agreement that the schedule is

logical or can be performed in the time or sequence indicated, but only that the Authority approves of the construction in that time and in that sequence.

Article 16: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA and SAMPLES (a) Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work

by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

(b) Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instruction, brochures,

diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate a material, product or system for some portion of Work.

(c) Samples are physical examples, which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish

standards of quality and esthetics by which the Work will be judged. (d) The Contractor shall review, approve and submit, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence

as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of the Authority or any separate contractor, all Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples required by the Contract Documents.

(e) By preparing and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, the Contractor represents

that it has determined and verified all materials, field measurements, and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and that it has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents.

(f) The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the

Contract Documents by the Engineer’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples unless the Contractor had specifically informed the Engineer in writing of such deviation at the time of submission and the Engineer has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor

- 11 -

shall not be relieved from responsibility of errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples by the Engineer’s approval thereof.

(g) The Contractor shall direct specific attention, inviting or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product

Data or Samples, to revisions other than those requested by the Engineer on previous submittals. (h) No portion of the Work requiring submission of a Shop Drawing, Product Data or Sample shall be

commenced until the submittal has been approved by the Engineer. All such portions of the Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals.

Article 17: MATERIALS, SERVICES, AND FACILITIES (a) Materials and equipment shall be so stored as to insure the preservation of their quality and fitness

for the work. Stored materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work shall be located so as to facilitate prompt inspection.

(b) Manufactured articles, materials, and equipment shall be stored, applied, installed, connected,

erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer, and as approved by the Engineer.

(c) Materials, supplies, and equipment shall be in accordance with samples, shop drawings, and

catalogue cuts submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer and Authority. (d) Materials, supplies, or equipment to be incorporated into the work shall not be purchased by the

Contractor or the Subcontractor subject to a chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller.

(e) All Work included in this Contract shall be performed to the standards specified. The Contractor

shall employ no plant, equipment, materials, methods or persons to which the Engineer or the Authority reasonably objects, and shall remove no plant, equipment or other facilities from the site of the work without permission of the Engineer and the Authority. The Contractor’s failure to comply with these requirements will constitute a breach of Contract and as such may result in a termination of the Contractor by the Authority.

Article 18: INSPECTION AND TESTING (a) All materials and equipment used in the construction of the Project shall be subject to adequate

inspection and testing in accordance with generally accepted industry standards and the Legal Requirements as defined in the Contract Documents.

(b) If the Contract Documents or the Legal Requirements require any part of the Work to specifically

be inspected, tested or approved by someone other than the Contractor, the Contractor shall initiate and coordinate those inspections, test, or approvals with the proper authorities and shall give the Engineer and the Authority three (3) working days written notice of each such inspection. The Contractor shall then furnish the Engineer and the Authority with the required certificates of inspection, testing or approval. Unless otherwise specifically provided for, the Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspections, tests or approvals.

(c) Inspection, test, or approvals by the Engineer or others will not relieve the Contractor from its

obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. (d) The Authority, the Engineer and their representatives shall at all times have access to the Work. In

addition, authorized representatives and agents of any participating federal, state or local agency shall be permitted to inspect all work, materials, payrolls, records of personnel, invoices of materials, and other relevant data and records. All such records shall remain available and accessible during performance of the Contract and until three years from the date of Final Payment, or, in case of dispute, for a period of three years after resolution of the dispute, whichever is later. The Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and observation of the Work and also for any inspection or testing thereof.

- 12 -

(e) If any work is covered without the approval of the Engineer contrary to requirements of the Contract Documents, it must, if requested by the Engineer or the Authority, be uncovered for its observation and then recovered at the Contractor’s expense.

(f) If the Engineer or the Authority considers it necessary or advisable that approved covered work be

inspected or tested by others, the Contractor, at the Engineer’s or the Authority’s request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make that portion of the Work available for observation, inspection or testing as the Engineer or the Authority may require. If it is found that such work is defective, the Contractor will bear all the expenses of such uncovering, exposure, and observation as well as all expenses for the inspection, testing, and satisfactory reconstruction of that portion of the Work. If, however, such work is not found to be defective, the Contractor will be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, and reconstruction, and an appropriate Change Order will be issued.

Article 19: SUBSTITUTIONS (a) After the Contract has been executed, the Authority and the Engineer will consider a written request

for the substitution of products or materials specified by the Contract Documents. The Authority is not obligated to consider substitutions and such consideration is the Authority’s sole discretion. By making requests for substitutions, the Contractor represents and certifies:

(1) that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product or material

and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified by the Contract Documents.

(2) that the Contractor will provide the Authority with a warranty of the substituted product

equal or superior to the warranty furnished in connection with the product or material originally specified by the Contract Documents.

(3) that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract

and Contractor waives all claims for any additional costs related to the substitution; and (4) that the Contractor will coordinate the installation of the substituted product or material

and that the Contractor will make all changes necessitated by the use of the substituted product without any additional cost to the Authority.

Article 20: PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all applicable royalties and license fees. It shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and save the Authority harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the Authority will be responsible for any such loss when a particular process, design or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers as specified is an infringement of a patent. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that such particular process, design or product is an infringement, he shall be responsible for such loss unless he gives written notice to the Authority and the Engineer of the possible infringement. Article 21: SURVEYS, PERMITS, REGULATIONS (a) The Authority will furnish all boundary surveys and establish all baselines for locating the principal

component parts of the Work together with suitable number of benchmarks adjacent to the Work as shown in the Contract Documents.

(b) Permits and licenses of a temporary nature necessary for the prosecution of the work, such as

building, plumbing, and electrical permits, shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Permits, licenses, and easements for permanent use of structures or permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and paid for by the Authority unless otherwise specified.

- 13 -

(c) The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all permits and the Legal Requirements in the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing if it comes to its attention that the Contract Documents are at variance with any such requirement.

(d) If any permit, license or certificate expire, be revoked, terminated or suspended because of any act or

omission of the Contractor, it shall not be entitled to any additional compensation for direct costs or to an extension of the Contract Time.

(e) Permits obtained by the Authority for this Project are available for inspection in the Authority’s

offices. Article 22: PROTECTION OF WORK, PROPERTY AND PERSONS (a) The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions

and programs in connection with the Work, in compliance with industry standards and the Legal requirements. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to all employees on the work and other persons who may be affected thereby, all the work and all materials or equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, and other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In case of suspension of work for any cause whatever, the contractor shall be responsible for the Project and shall take such precautions as may be necessary to prevent damage to the Work, provide for proper drainage and shall erect any necessary temporary structures, signs, or other facilities at its expense. During such period or suspension of work, the Contractor shall properly and continuously maintain in acceptable growing condition all living material in newly established plantings, seedings, and sodding furnished under this Contract, and shall take adequate precautions to protect new growth and other important growth against injury. Contractor shall also notify owners of adjacent utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them.

(b) In emergencies affecting the safety of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto,

the Contractor shall act, at its discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Any additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work shall be determined as provided in the Contract Documents.

Article 23: SUPERVISION BY CONTRACTOR (a) The Contractor shall supervise and direct the work. It shall be solely responsible for the means,

methods, techniques, sequencers and procedures of construction. The Contractor shall employ and maintain on the work a qualified supervisor or superintendent (“Supervisor”) and provide a resume of its experience. This Supervisor shall have been designated in writing as the Contractor’s representative at the site and shall not thereafter be changed unless such change is approved by or directed by the Authority. The Authority shall have the right to approve this Supervisor or order its removal from the job site, which right shall not be unreasonably exercised. This Supervisor shall have full authority to act on behalf of the Contractor and all communications given to the Supervisor shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. This Supervisor shall be present on the site at all times as required to perform adequate supervision, control and coordination of the Work as determined by the Engineer or the Authority.

(b) The Contractor shall be responsible to the Authority for the acts and omissions of its employees,

Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with the Contractor.

(c) The Contractor shall not be relieved from its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the

Contract Documents either by the activities or duties of the Engineer and the Authority in their administration of the Contract or by inspections, tests, or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor.

(d) Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall check all work performed by others that is

necessary for the execution of the Contractor’s work and shall promptly report to the Engineer in

- 14 -

writing any deficiencies in such work which render it unacceptable or unsuitable for the Contractor’s Work or which will increase the cost of the Work. Failure to give such written notice shall relieve the Authority of any responsibility therefore. The Contractor shall be responsible for all elevations, grades, and proper fitting of its Work.

Article 24: CHANGES IN THE WORK (a) The Authority, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general

scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, with the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes in Work shall be authorized by written Change Order signed by the Authority and the Engineer, and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents.

(b) The cost or credit to the Authority resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined in one or

more of the following ways:

(1) by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

(2) by unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

(3) by cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a combined overhead

and profit of 15% of such costs if the Contractor performs the work with its own forces, or 15% for the combined overhead and profit of a Subcontractor performing the work with its own forces and 5% for the Contractor; in no event shall the total mark-up for overhead and profit exceed 20% of the cost; or

(4) by the method provided in Article 25(c).

(c) If none of the methods set forth above is agreed upon, the Contractor, provided it receives a Construction Change Directive signed by the Authority, shall promptly proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such Work shall then be determined by the Engineer on the basis of the reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in the case of an increase in the Contract Sum, a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit. In such case, and also under Article 25(b(3) above, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Engineer may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data of the costs for inclusion in a Change Order. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs shall be limited to the following: cost of materials, including sales tax and cost of delivery,, cost of labor, including social security, unemployment insurance, and fringe benefits required by agreement or custom; workers’ or workmen’s compensation insurance; bond premiums; and rental value of equipment and machinery. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Authority for any deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum will be the amount of the actual net cost as confirmed by the Engineer. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any, with respect to that change.

(d) The Engineer or the Authority also may at any time by issuing a Field Order, make changes in the

details of the Work. The Contractor shall proceed with the performance of any changes in the work so ordered and should the Contractor believe that such Field Order entitles it to a change in Contract Price or Time, or both, it shall give the Engineer and the Authority Written Notice thereof within ten days after the receipt of the Field Order. Failure to provide such written notice shall be deemed a waiver of any claims arising from or relating to the Field Order. Failure to proceed with work changed by a Field Order or a Change Order shall constitute a breach of contract and shall be cause for the termination of the Contract. All requests for a Change Order arising out of a Field Order must have a copy of the referenced Field Order attached.

(e) Where the Work is contracted for on a unit price basis and the actual quantity of work for any pay

item exceeds the estimated quantity by more than 25% of that amount stated in the Contract Documents, a Change Order will be issued for any increase or decrease in unit cost, which results

- 15 -

from the increased work. If the quantity variation is such as to cause an increase in the time necessary for completion, the Authority shall, upon receipt of a written request for an extension of time, make an appropriate adjustment for extending the completion date in accordance with Article 26.

Article 25: CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT SUM OR OTHER RELIEF (a) If the Contractor wants to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, or for any other relief

under the Contract, it shall give the Engineer and the Authority written notice of the claim within ten (10) days after the occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim. This notice shall be given by the Contractor before proceeding to execute any additional Work, except in an emergency endangering life or property. The notice shall set forth the basis for the claim and the relief or increase in the Contract Sum requested by the Contractor. After providing notice of its claim, Contractor shall provide the Authority and the Engineer with any information and/or documents requested by them to evaluate the claim. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. If the Authority and the Contractor cannot agree on the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, it shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with Article 40(e). Any change in the Contract Sum resulting from such claim shall be authorized by Change Order.

(b) If the Contractor claims that additional cost is required because of, but not limited to,

(1) any written interpretation of the Contract Documents;

(2) any order by the Authority to stop the Work where the Contractor was not at fault; or (3) any Field Order directed change in the Work; the Contractor shall make such claim as

provided in Article 25(a). Article 26: TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES (a) All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. (b) The Contractor shall proceed with the Work with the diligence necessary to insure Substantial

Completion within the Contract Time. It is expressly understood and agreed by and between the Contractor and the Authority that the Contract Time for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable and adequate time, taking into consideration the average climate and economic conditions and other factors prevailing in the locality of the Work.

(c) If the Contractor shall fail to Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time, or

extension of time granted by the Authority, then the Contractor shall pay to the Authority liquidated damages as specified in the Contract Documents for each calendar day after the date of Substantial Completion until the Work achieves Substantial Completion. Contractor agrees that the amount of liquidated damages is reasonable and waives any right it may have to contest the amount of liquidated damages as being unreasonable or a penalty. If liquidated damages are not set forth in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for any loss or damage arising from the Contractor’s failure to complete the Work by the date of Substantial Completion.

(d) If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the progress of the Work by any act or neglect of the

Authority or the Engineer, or by any employee of either, or by any separate contractor employed by the Authority, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in transportation, unusual and adverse weather conditions that could not be reasonably anticipated, unavoidable casualties, or any causes beyond the Contractor’s control, or by delay authorized by the Authority, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Engineer may determine.

(e) Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Engineer and the Authority within

(10) days after the commencement of the event giving rise to or causing the claimed delay; otherwise it shall be waived. The notice shall set forth the basis for the extension of time and any other relief requested by the Contractor. After providing notice of its claim, Contractor shall provide the Authority and the Engineer with any information and/or documents requested by them to evaluate

- 16 -

the claim. In the case of a continuing delay only one notice of claim is necessary. The Contractor shall precisely identify the delay and its cause, and provide an estimate of the probable effect of such delay on the progress of the Work.

(f) Contractor hereby expressly waives any claims against the Authority and the Engineer for any

indirect or direct damages, costs or expenses which the Contractor or its Subcontractors may incur as a result of any delay in the performance of the Contract, except and then only to the extent that the delay is caused by any act or omission of the Authority or the Engineer, or their agents or employees, and is due to causes within their control. In such event, Contractor may seek direct costs arising solely from the delay but shall not be entitled to any indirect costs including, without limitation, home office overhead costs. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy in case of any noncompensable delay shall be an extension of the Contract Time, but only as determined in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents.

(g) In the event that Contractor has incurred a delay for which it believes it is entitled to compensation

under this Contract, it shall give the Authority written notice of that claim within ten (10) days of the commencement of the delay, and shall identify what it considers to be the cause of and expected duration of the delay.

Article 27: CORRECTION OF WORK (a) The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all work rejected by the Engineer or the

Authority for failure to comply with the Contract Documents whether incorporated in the construction or not, and the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute the work in accordance with the Contract Documents and without expense to the Authority and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement.

(b) Unauthorized work shall be any work done or materials ordered by the Contractor prior to receipt of the Notice to Proceed, previously rejected work incorporated into the Project, work done contrary to or regardless of the instructions of the Engineer, extra work performed without proper written authority, work done beyond the limits shown on the Plans, except as herein specified, any extra work done without written authority from the Engineer or the Authority, or any work done after discovery of a discrepancy, ambiguity, or inconsistency and before the Engineer provides any necessary instructions to the Contractor. The Authority shall not pay for unauthorized work. Unauthorized work may, at the Authority’s sole discretion, be ordered removed or replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

Article 28: SUSPENSION OF WORK; THE AUTHORITY’S RIGHT TO STOP AND CARRY OUT THE WORK (a) The Authority may order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay, or interrupt all or any part of

the Work for such period of time as it may determine to be appropriate for the convenience of the Authority.

(b) The Authority’s Right to Stop the Work

If the Contractor fails to correct defective Work as required, fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if an emergency situation exists that threatens the safety of persons or property, the Authority, in addition to any other remedies it may have, by a written notice direct the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated. Contractor shall be liable to the Authority for any loss of damages arising from the stoppage of the Work including, without limitation, any loss or damage arising from a delay in the completion of the Work.

(c) Authority’s Right to Carry Out the Work

If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within two (2) days after receipt of written notice from the Authority to commence and continue correction for such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the

- 17 -

Authority may, after two (2) days following receipt by the Contractor of an additional written notice of its decision to do so, make good such deficiencies without prejudice to any other remedy it may have. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Engineer’s additional services or other services as may be required and made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Authority. All charges and back charges made against monies otherwise owed to or due to the Contractor shall be deemed accepted unless the Contractor rejects them in writing to the Authority within ten (10) days of receipt and states fully its reasons for rejecting them.

Article 29: TERMINATION (a) If the Contractor is adjudged a bankrupt or insolvent, or if it makes a general assignment for the

benefit of its creditors, or if a trustee or receiver is appointed for the Contractor or for any of its property, or if it files a petition to take advantage of any debtor’s act, or to reorganize under the bankruptcy or applicable laws, or if it fails to supply sufficient skilled workmen or suitable materials or equipment, or if it fails to make prompt payments to subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment, or if it refuses or fails to prosecute the Work or any separable part thereof, with such diligence as will insure its completion within the Contract Time, or if it fails to complete the Work within the Contract Time required, or if it disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, directions or orders of any public body having jurisdiction over the Work, or if it disregards the authority of the Engineer, or if it otherwise violates any provision of the Contract Documents, then the Authority may, without prejudice to any other right or remedy, seven (7) days after delivery of a written notice to the Contractor and its surety, terminate the services of the Contractor and take possession of the Project and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor, and finish the Work by whatever method it may deem expedient. In such case, the Contractor will not be entitled to receive any future payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct and indirect costs of completing the Project, including compensation for additional professional services, such excess will be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Authority. Such cost incurred by the Authority will be determined by the Engineer and incorporated in a Change Order.

(b) If termination for cause by the Authority is deemed to be improper, it shall be deemed a termination

for convenience. (c) Where the Contractor’s services have been so terminated by the Authority, the termination shall not

affect any rights the Authority then has or that may thereafter accrue against the Contractor. Any retention or payment of monies by the Authority due the Contractor will not release the contractor from compliance with the Contract Documents.

(d) Termination for Convenience

The Authority may, effective not less than after seven (7) days from delivery of a written notice to the Contractor, without cause and without prejudice to any other rights or remedies it may have, terminate this Construction Contract for its own convenience for any reason. When this Construction Contract has been terminated for convenience, the Contractor shall be paid only for Work performed through the date of termination The Contractor shall not be entitled to anticipated profits on unperformed portions of the Work.

Article 30: USE OF THE PREMISES (a) The Authority will have the right to enter the premises for the purpose of doing work not covered by

the Contract Documents. This provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the care and protection of the Work or the restoration of any damaged work, except such as may be caused by agents or employees of the Authority.

- 18 -

(b) Prior to Substantial Completion, the Authority, with the concurrence of the Contractor, may use any completed or substantially completed portion of the Work. Such use shall not constitute a final acceptance of such portions of the Work unless otherwise stated so in writing.

Article 31: PAYMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR (a) Prior to submitting its first application for payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Authority

and the Engineer a schedule of values allocating the costs of the various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as may be required by the Authority and the Engineer. This schedule, as approved, shall be used as a basis for Contractor’s applications for payment, which shall be submitted on the current edition of the AIA Application and Certification for Payment (“Application for Payment”), AIA Document G702.

(b) At least twenty days before each progress payment falls due (but not more than once a month), the

Contractor, the Engineer, and the Authority shall meet at the Project to determine the percentage of completion of the individual items in the schedule of values. If no agreement is reached, the Contractor shall prepare its Application for Payment using percentages it considers correct. Thereafter, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer three (3) copies of its completed and signed Applications for Payment covering the work performed during the period of the Application for Payment and supported by such data as the Engineer may reasonably require. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by such supporting data, satisfactory to the Engineer, as will protect the Authority’s interests therein, including applicable insurance. See Article 32(c). The Engineer will, within fifteen days after receipt of each Application for Payment, either certify in writing its approval of payment for an amount based either on the agreed percentages of completion or the percentages the Engineer considers correct and present the Application for Payment to the Authority, or return the Application for Payment to the contractor stating in writing its reasons for refusing to approve payment. If payment has been refuse, the Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment to the Engineer. The Authority will, within thirty days of its receipt of an approved Application for Payment, pay the Contractor a progress payment in the amount certified by the engineer, unless the Authority has reason to refuse payment of that amount in whole or in part, in which event it shall state its reasons in writing to the Contractor. The Authority will retain five (5) percent of the amount of each payment due until final completion and acceptance of all work. However, the Authority may, in its sole discretion, reduce the amount retained to 150% of the value of work remaining when the work is substantially complete. The decision to reduce retainage and the amount of such reduction shall be solely that of the Authority. On completion and acceptance of a part of the Work on which the price is stated separately in the Contract Documents, payment may be made in full, including retained percentages less authorized deductions. Prior to receiving each payment, and as part of its Applications for Payment, the Contractor shall certify in writing that it has made payment from the proceeds of prior payments and that it will make timely payments form the proceeds of progress and final payment then due it, to its subcontractors and suppliers in accordance with its contractual arrangement with them. If requested by the Authority, the Contractor shall provide evidence of such payments, including affidavits by subcontractors and suppliers.

(c) The Application for Payment may also include an allowance for the cost of major materials and

equipment not yet incorporated in the Work. When requested in writing by the Contractor and approved in writing by the Authority, payment will be made for nonperishable major material and equipment delivered and properly stored at the Work site or other approved site. Material for which payment has been made, wholly or partially, shall not be removed from the Work site or other approved site unless authorized by the Authority in writing.

(d) The Contractor shall indemnify and save the Authority and its agents harmless from all losses,

damages, liabilities, including attorney’s fees, arising out of the demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery parts thereof, equipment, tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of the Work. The Contractor shall, at the Engineer’s request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature designated above have been paid, discharged, or waived. If the Contractor fails to do so, the Authority may, after having notified the Contractor, either pay unpaid bills or withhold from the Contractor’s unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims

- 19 -

until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged whereupon payment to the Contractor will be resumed in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents. In no event, however, shall the provisions of the foregoing sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Authority to either the Contractor, its Surety, or any third party. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, any payment so made by the Authority will be considered as a payment made under the Contract Documents by the Authority to the Contractor and the Authority will not be liable to the Contractor for any such payments in good faith.

(e) If the Authority fails to make a payment when due under the terms of this Contract, interest shall

accrue on monies due and owing at the rate of 3% per annum commencing sixty (60) days after the date the payment was due.

(f) The Authority may reduce in whole or in part any approved Application for Payment, whether or

not it has been paid, to the extent necessary to protect the Authority from loss because of:

(1) defective Work not remedied; (2) failure to timely or properly pay Subcontractors;

(3) evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the amount remaining to be paid; or

(4) damage to the Authority;

(5) a persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Article 32: SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK (a) When the Contractor considers that the Work or, if agreed to by the Authority, a designated portion

thereof is Substantially Complete as defined in Article 1, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Engineer a list of items to be completed or corrected. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Engineer on the basis of its inspection determines that the Work or designated portion thereof is Substantially Complete, it will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the Date of Substantial Completion, shall state the responsibilities of the Authority and the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall complete the items listed therein. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Authority and the Contractor for their written acceptance of the responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.

(b) Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof and upon application by the

Contractor and certification by the Engineer, the Authority shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or portion thereof, as provided in the Contract Documents.

Article 33: FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT (a) Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon

receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Engineer will promptly make such inspection and, when it finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, it will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of its knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of its observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance stated therein is due and payable to the Contractor. If the Contractor has completed all of the requirements and conditions, Final Payment shall be made within 30 days of receipt of the Contractor’s Application. The Engineer’s Final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that the conditions precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment as set forth in Article 32(b) have been fulfilled.

- 20 -

(b) Neither the final payment nor the remaining retained percentage shall become due until the

Contractor submits to the Engineer (1) an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Authority or its property might in any way be responsible, have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, (3) if required by the Authority, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, release and waivers of liens arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Authority, (4) two (2) binders containing all product and equipment manuals, warranties and guarantees, and (5) as-built drawings. If any Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Authority, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Authority to indemnify it against any such lien. If any such lien remains unsatisfied after all payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Authority all monies that the latter may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees.

(c) If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through

no fault of the Contractor or by the issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Engineer so confirms, the Authority shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance of the Contract Sum is less than the retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall then be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment. However, that payment shall not constitute a waiver of any claims the Authority may then or thereafter have.

(d) The acceptance of final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those

previously made in writing, properly reserved pursuant to these General Conditions, and identified by the Contractor as unsettled at the time of the final Application for Payment. Such contractual claims, whether form money or other relief, shall be submitted in writing not later than 60 days after final payment. The Authority’s Capital Programs Director shall review such contractual claims and issue a final decision in writing within 90 days after receipt.

Article 34: INSURANCE

(a) Contractor’s Liability Insurance

The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect it from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by itself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: (1) claims under workers’ or workmen’s compensation, disability benefit and other similar

employee benefit acts;

(2) claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of its employees;

(3) claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person

other than its employees; (4) claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage, which are sustained

(1) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by any other person;

(5) claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of

tangible property, including loss of use resulting there from; and (6) claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage

arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle.

- 21 -

Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis

including:

(1) Premises Operations (including X, C and U coverage); (2) Independent Contractor’s Protective; (3) Products and Completed Operations; (4) Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusions deleted; (5) Contractual, including provisions for indemnity obligations under this Agreement; (6) Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles; (7) Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operation

Contractor shall have and maintain the following insurance in the amounts set forth below unless

otherwise agreed to by the Owner in writing: (1) Workers’ Compensation Insurance in an amount as required by state law. Employer’s Liability with a minimum limit of $500,000 per occurrence for bodily injury. (2) Commercial General Liability Insurance including coverage for bodily injury, property

damage, contractual liability and products/completed operations with a minimum coverage of $5,000,000 per occurrence and $5,000,000 in the aggregate. Property damage coverage shall include coverage for explosion, collapse and underground hazards. Coverage for products/completed operations shall extend for a period of three (3) years after the date of substantial completion.

(3) Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance for bodily injury and property damage with

a minimum coverage of $5,000,000 per occurrence and $5,000,000 in the aggregate. (4) Excess or Umbrella insurance supplementing coverage under the Commercial General

Liability, Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance and Employer’s Liability Insurance policies with a minimum coverage of $5,000,000 per occurrence and $5,000,000 in the aggregate

The Contractor shall endorse the Authority on its insurance policy as an additional insured to

protect the interests of the public. Certificates of Insurance and Additional Insured Endorsements acceptable to the Authority shall be filed with the Authority prior to commencement of the Work. These Certificates and Endorsements shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be cancelled until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Authority. Insurance certificates must include an additional insured endorsement naming the following as an additional insured: “The Northern Virginia Regional Park Authority, its officers, directors, agents, employees, and volunteers.” The endorsement must be completed on endorsement form CG 20 10 11 85 or CG 20 10 07 04 or such other form acceptable to the Authority.

(b) The Authority’s Liability Insurance

The Authority shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining its own liability insurance and, at its option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect it against claims that may arise from operations under the Contract.

(c) Property Insurance

Unless otherwise provided, the Authority shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the entire Work at the site to the full insurable value thereof. This insurance shall include the interests of the Authority, the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors in the Work and shall

- 22 -

insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and shall include “all risk” insurance for physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief. If the Authority does not intend to purchase such insurance for the full insurable value of the entire Work, it shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then affect insurance that will protect the interests of itself, its Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Authority. If not covered under the all risk insurance or otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall effect and maintain similar property insurance on portions of the Work stored off the site or in transit when such portions of the Work are to be included in an Application for Payment.

(d) The Authority shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance as may be required by the Contract Documents or by law. This insurance shall include the interests of the Authority, the Contractor, Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractors in the Work

(e) Any loss insured under Article 34(c) is to be adjusted with the Authority and made payable to the Authority as trustee for the insured’s, as their interests may appear. The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, shall require each Subcontractor to make payments to its Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.

(f) If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described in Article

34(c) or (d) or other special hazards be included in the property insurance policy, the Authority may, if possible and in its sole discretion, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall the charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order.

(g) The Authority and the Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and the Subcontractors,

Sub-subcontractors, agents and employees each of the other, and (2) the Engineer and separate contractors, if any, and their subcontractors, sub-contractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by insurance obtained pursuant to Article 34(c) or (d) or any other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Engineer as trustee. The foregoing waiver afforded the Engineer, its agents and employees shall not extend to the liability imposed by Article 36(a). The Authority or the Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Engineer, separate contractors, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of all other parities enumerated in this Article 34(g).

(h) If required in writing by the Contractor, the Authority as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an

insured loss, deposit in a separate account any money so received, and shall distribute it in accordance with the interests of the parties. If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of damaged work shall be covered by an appropriate Change Order.

(i) The Authority as trustee shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers. (j) If the Authority finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to

Substantial Completion thereof, such occupancy or use shall not commence prior to a time mutually agreed to by the Authority and the Contractor and to which the insurance company or companies providing the property insurance have consented by endorsement to the policy or policies. This insurance shall not be cancelled or lapsed on account of such partial occupancy or use. Consent of the Contractor and of the insurance company or companies to such occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.

Article 35: ASSIGNMENTS Neither the Contractor nor the Authority shall sell, transfer, assign, or otherwise dispose of the Contract or any portion thereof, or of its rights, title, or interest therein, or its obligations thereunder, without written consent of both parties.

- 23 -

Article 36: INDEMNIFICATION (a) To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the

Authority, the Engineer and their agents, officers, directors and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses and expense, including but not limited to attorney’s fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense (1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to any party or person described in this Article.

(b) In any and all claims against the Authority or the Engineer or any of their agents or employees by

any employee of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or anyone whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Article shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor under workers’ or workmen’s compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit act.

(c) The Authority shall retain such monies due or to become due the Contractor under the Contract as

considered necessary by the Authority until such suits, claims for damages costs or losses have been settled or otherwise disposed of or satisfactory evidence to that effect has been furnished to the Authority.

Article 37: CONTRACTOR LIABILITY The Contractor shall be liable to Authority for all costs the Authority incurs as a result of the Contractor’s failure to perform this Contract in accordance with its terms. The Contractor’s failure to perform shall include the failure of its suppliers and or Subcontractors of any tier to perform. Contractor’s liability shall include, but not be limited to, (1) damages, liquidated damages, and other delay costs payable to the Authority; (2) the Authority’s increased costs of performance, such as extended overhead and increased performance costs resulting from Contractor-caused delays, improper Contractor work, or termination of the Contractor; (3) warranty and rework costs; (4) liability to third parties; (5) excess costs; and (6) attorney’s fees and related costs. Article 38: SEPARATE CONTRACTS (a) The Authority reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this Project. The

Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work and shall properly connect and coordinate its work with theirs. If the proper execution or results of any part of the Contractor’s work depends upon the work of any other contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Engineer any defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. The commencement of work by the Contractor shall indicate an acceptance of the previous contractor’s work.

(b) The Authority may perform additional work related to the Project by itself, or it may let other

contracts containing provisions similar to these. The Contractor shall afford the other contractors who are parties to such contracts, the Authority, if it is performing the additional work itself, reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of work and shall properly connect and coordinate it Work with theirs.

(c) If the performance of additional work by other contractors or the Authority is not specified in the

Contract Documents prior to the execution of the Contract, Written Notice thereof shall be given to the Contractor prior to starting any such additional work. If the Contractor believes that the performance of such additional work by the Authority or others will result in additional expense to the Contractor or entitle it to an extension of the Contract Time, it may make a claim therefore as provided in Articles 25, 26 and 27.

- 24 -

Article 39: SUBCONTRACTING (a) The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors – which will have been approved by the

Authority prior to commencement of the work – on those parts of the Work that, under normal contracting practices are performed by Subcontractors. The Contractor shall submit a list of proposed Subcontractors prior to commencement of the Work for the Authority’s review and approval. The Contractor shall not employ a Subcontractor to which the Authority may object. The Authority shall not withhold its approval unreasonably.

(b) The Contractor shall not award work to a single Subcontractors in excess of 50 percent of the

Contract Price without prior written approval of the Authority. (c) The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the Authority for the acts and omissions of its

Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as it is for the acts and omissions of person directly employed by it. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the coordination of the work of the trades, Subcontractors and suppliers, and their officers, agents and employees.

(d) By an appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent

of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, assumes toward the Authority and the Engineer. The agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Authority and the Engineer under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the Contractor-Subcontractor agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies, and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by these Documents, has against the Authority. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with its Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the Subcontract, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound by this Paragraph and identify to the Subcontractor any terms and conditions of the proposed Subcontract that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontractor shall similarly make copies of such Documents available to its Sub-subcontractors.

(e) Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual arrangement between any

Subcontractor and the Authority. (f) Within seven (7) days after receipt of amounts paid to it, contractor shall either:

(1) Pay its subcontractors for the proportionate share of the total payment received attributable to the work performed by the subcontractor under the contract; or

(2) Notify the Authority and subcontractor in writing of his intentions to withhold all or part of

the subcontractor’s payment with the reasons for the nonpayment. (g) Contractor shall include in each of its subcontracts a provision requiring each subcontractor to

include or otherwise be subject to the same payment and interest requirements with respect to each lower-tier subcontractor that the contractor is subject to in subparagraph (f) and Article 32(e).

Article 40: ENGINEER (a) The Engineer will act as the Authority’s representative during the construction period and until final

payment. (b) The Engineer will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to familiarize

itself and determine in general if the work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Engineer will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of its on-site observations, it will keep the

- 25 -

Authority informed of the progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Authority against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor.

(c) The Engineer will not be responsible for and will not have control or charge of construction means,

methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, and it will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Engineer will not be responsible for or have control or charge over the acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or any of their agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. This Article shall in no way change the Engineer’s responsibilities or liability to Authority.

(d) The Engineer will render interpretations necessary for the proper execution or progress of the Work,

with reasonable promptness and in accordance with any time limit agreed upon. Either party to the Contract may make a written request to the Engineer for such interpretations.

(e) Claims, disputes, and other matters in question between the Contractor and the Authority relating to

the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents shall be referred initially to the Engineer for decision, which it will render in writing within a reasonable time. Unless the Contractor provides written notice to the Authority and the Engineer of any objection to the Engineer’s decision, the Engineer’s decision shall be final and binding.

(f) All interpretations and decisions of the Engineer shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably

inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. The Engineer will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both the Authority and The Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for the result of any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity.

(g) The Engineer’s decisions in matters relating to artistic effect will be final if consistent with the intent

of the Contract Documents and agreed to by the Authority. (h) The parties agree to perform the Work, accept the interpretation or otherwise follow the decision of

the Engineer so as to not delay the progress of the Work. Notwithstanding this provision, the Authority may stop the Work pending a judicial review of the Engineer’s decision.

(i) The Engineer will have authority to reject Work, which does not conform to the Contract

Documents. (j) The Engineer will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor’s

submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for conformance with the design concept of the Work and with the information given in the Contract Documents. Such action shall be taken with reasonable promptness so as to cause no delay. The Engineer’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.

(k) The Engineer will conduct inspections to determine the dates of Substantial Completion and final

completion, will receive and forward to the Authority for the Authority’s review written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of Article 34.

(l) Notwithstanding any other provision to the contrary, Article 40(e) to (h) shall not apply to this

project if there IS no Project Engineer. Article 41: WARRANTY (a) The Contractor warrants to the Authority and the Engineer that all materials and equipment

furnished under this Contract will be new unless otherwise specified and that all Work will be performed in a good and workmanlike manner and will be of good quality, free from faults and defects and in conformance with the Contract Documents and the Legal Requirements. All Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of the kind and quality of materials and equipment.

- 26 -

(b) The Contractor shall promptly correct all Work rejected by the Engineer as defective or as failing to

conform to the Contract Documents whether observed before or after substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. The Contractor shall bar all costs of correcting such rejected Work, including compensation for the Engineer’s additional services made necessary thereby.

(c) If, within one year after the Date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion

thereof or within one year after acceptance by the Authority of designated equipment or within such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of a written notice from the Authority to do so unless the Authority has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This obligation shall survive termination of the Contract. The Authority shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition.

Article 42: CONTRACTUAL DISPUTES Contractual claims, whether for money or for other relief, shall be submitted in writing not later than (60) sixty days after final payment; however, written notice of the Contractor’s intention to file such claim must be given at the time of the occurrence or beginning of the work upon which the claim is based. A written decision upon any such claims will be made by the Authority within thirty (30) days after submittal. The Contractor may not institute legal action prior to receipt of the Authority’s decision on the claim unless it fails to render such decision within 120 days. The decision of the Capital Programs Director or other signatory on the Contract shall be final and conclusive unless the Contractor within six (6) months of the date of the final decision on a claim, initiates legal action as provided in § 2.2-4364 of the Code of Virginia. Failure of the Authority to render a decision within 120 days shall not result in the Contractor being awarded the relief claimed nor shall it result in any other relief or penalty. The sole result of the Authority’s failure to render a decision within the time allotted shall be the Contractor’s right to immediately institute legal action. No administrative appeals procedure pursuant to § 2.2-4365 of the Code of Virginia has established for contractual claims under this Contract.

Revised 12/10/13

1

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

This Construction Contract is made this day of , 2015 by and between NOVA

Parks, 5400 Ox Road, Fairfax Station, Virginia 22039 ("Authority"), and _____________ (Contractor) for the project known as _____________. Article 1.

1.1 The Contract Documents consist of this Construction Contract, the Conditions of the Contract (General Supplementary, Special, and other Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications, all standard details that apply to any portion of the Work, and all addenda issued prior to and Change Orders issued after execution of this Construction Contract. The Contract Documents are more specifically listed in Exhibit A. Minimum contractor's liability insurance amounts are listed in Exhibit B.

Article 2. The Work

2.1 The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to perform __________________________ as shown, indicated or reasonably implied by the Contract Documents. The Work shall be done in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and all applicable federal, state, and local governmental specifications and requirements. Article 3. Time of Commencement and Completion

3.1 The Contract Time will begin to run on the date indicated in the Authority's written Notice to Proceed. The Contractor shall start the Work within five (5) days of the date of the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor shall prosecute the work in such a manner as to achieve Substantial Completion of the base portion of the work within the time limits indicated in the Supplemental General Conditions.

3.2 If the Work is not Substantially Completed within the time required, as that time may be adjusted by Change Orders, there shall be imposed on the Contractor Liquidated Damages of $ per calendar day for each day beyond the Contract Time it takes to substantially complete the Work. Contractor is specifically referred to the General Conditions regarding its duties to notify the Authority in writing of any delays caused to it during the Work. The Liquidated Damages amount shall, in no event, be considered a penalty or other than the liquidated and adjusted damages to the Authority because of the delay. The Contractor and its surety agree that the stated sum per day shall be deducted and retained out of the monies which may become due hereunder and if not so deducted, the Contractor and its surety shall be liable therefore. Article 4. Contract Sum

4.1 Authority agrees to pay Contractor ______ (Dollars) ($ ) for the Work including the Base Bid, subject to additions and deductions by Change Order.

4.2 The Authority shall make monthly progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided in the Contract Documents for the period ending the last day of each month. Not later than fifteen (15) days after the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment, Contractor will submit to the Architect a Request for Payment based on the payment schedule of values agreed to by the Architect. The Contractor's submission of its Application for Payment, the Authority's and Architect's review, and the Authority's payment of progress and final payments shall all be in accordance with the General Conditions.

2

Article 5. Miscellaneous Provisions

5.1 This Contract shall be construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the Commonwealth of Virginia.

5.2 During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows:

A. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, or national origin, except where religion, sex, or national origin is a bona fide occupation qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of the Contractor. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.

B. The Contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, will state that such Contractor is an equal opportunity employer.

C. Notices, advertisements, and solicitations placed in accordance with federal law, rule, or regulation shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting the requirements of this section.

The Contractor will include the provisions of subparagraphs A, B, and C above, in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000 so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.

5.3 These terms and provisions supersede all previous communications, representations, or agreements, either oral or written, between the parties with respect to the subject matter of this Contract. This Agreement is entered into as of the day and year first written above. NOVA Parks CONTRACTOR Company: ____________________ By: ___________________________ By: __________________________ Title: __________________________ Title: _________________________ Date: __________________________ Date: _________________________ Exhibit A - Contract Documents Exhibit B - Contractor's Liability Insurance General liability in the amount of not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate. Property damage in the amount of not less than $1,000,000 for any one accident. Additional limits may be

required. Umbrella policy for not less than $1,000,000. Auto liability insurance for not less than $1,000,000 combined single limits. Workers’ Compensation per statutory limits and employer’s liability in the following minimum amounts: EL

Each Accident - $500,000, EL Disease Policy Limit - $500,000, EL Disease Each Employee $500,000. Contractor shall endorse the Authority on its insurance policy as an additional insured using form CG 20 10

11 85 or CG 20 10 07 04.